Manual

NOTEBOOK
WORK ORGANIZER
PN-4400 USER'S
GUIDE
At.
AMERICAN
This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Congratulations!
Thank you for choosing Brother's Notebook Work Organizer! This machine is
designed to deliver years of reliable operation. Please read this manual carefully
and keep it in a safe place for future reference. We recommend that you write the
unit's model number and serial number in the blank space below. These numbers
can be found on the rear panel of the work organizer.
MODEL No.: PN-4400 SERIAL No.:
FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful,interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• This equipment has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are
applied to the U.S.A. only. A shielded interface cable should be used
according to FCC 15.27 (a).
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd.
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARK NOTICE
1 Spell Checker : Spelling Corrector and Electronic Thesaurus licensed from
Houghton Mifflin Company. Spelling U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,580,241 and
4,730,269.
Copyright 1985 by Houghton Mifflin. All rights reserved. Reproduction or
disassembly of embodied programs or database prohibited. Based upon
Th American Heritage Dictionary, and Rogers II: The New Thesaurus.
2 TETRISTm : © 1987 V/O Electronorgtechnica (Elorg). All Rights Reserved.

TETRIS is a trademark of Elorg. TETRIS copyright and trademark licensed
to Sphere, Inc. and sublicensed to Brother Industries, Ltd. Original concept
by Alexey Pazhitnov. Brother version © 1991 Brother Industries, Ltd.
3. Centronics is a trademark of Genicom Corporation.
4. Epson is a trademark of Epson Corporation.
5. IBM is a trademark of International Business Machine Corporation.
6. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.

Table of Contents
Getting Started 1
Precautions 1
Description of the Machine 2
Setting Up 4
Connecting the AC Adapter 4
Inserting the Lithium Battery 5
Installing a Rechargeable Battery 6
Charging the Rechargeable Battery 6
Precautions Regarding the Rechargeable Battery 7
Transporting the Machine 7
Connecting other Equipment 8
Printer 8
Modem and Fax Adapter 9
Connection with another Computer 10
Floppy Disks 11
Inserting and Removing a Floppy Disk 11
Write-Protecting Your Disks 11
Caring for Your Disks 12
Initializing New Disks 12
Backing up a Disk 13
General Features 14
The Modes of Operation 14
The Auto Power-off Function 15
'The Time Clock 15
The Memory 16
The Display 17
The Keyboard 17
The Character Keys 17
The Keyboard Control Keys 18
The Function Keys 19
Some Important Function Keys 20
The MAIN MENU 21
Switching the Display Back Light ON/OFF 21
Printer Set Up 22
Selecting the Printer 22
Setting the Printer Parameters 24
Password 25
To Set a Password 26
To Change a Password 26
To Cancel a Password 26
Self-Demonstration 26
Scheduler / Calendar 29
The Scheduler / Calendar Mode 29
Before you start 29
How to Start? 29
How to Enter a Daily Schedule? 30
How to Go from one Screen to Another? 31
How to Finish? 31
The DAILY Screen 32
Moving the Cursor 32
Entering or Editing Data 32
Setting an Alarm 34

Using the Function Menu 35
Printing the DAILY Screen 35
Switching to the CALENDAR Screen 35
Deleting Scheduled Days 35
Switching to the MONTHLY Screen 36
Jumping to Another Month 37
Searching 37
Selecting the Range of Hours 39
The MONTHLY Screen 40
Switching to the DAILY Screen 40
Printing the MONTHLY Screen 41
Switching to the CALENDAR Screen 41
Deleting Scheduled Days 41
Setting Holidays 42
Jumping to Another Month 43
Searching 44
Loading a Scheduler/Calendar File from the Disk 45
Saving the Current File on Disk 46
The CALENDAR Screen 48
Address Book 49
The Address Book Mode 49
How to Start? 49
Creating and Editing an Address Book File 50
How to Finish? 51
The DATA INPUT Screen 52
Switching from ADDRESS BOOK to DATA INPUT Screen 52
To Edit a Record 52
To Input a New Record 52
Entering and Editing a Record 53
The ADDRESS BOOK Screen 54
Editing the Labels 54
Preparing the Records for Merge Printing 55
Printing the Address Book File (PRINT) 56
If you selected LABEL.. 57
If you selected LIST 59
During Printing 60
Block Operations (Kock) 60
Copying Records 60
Deleting Records 61
Moving Records 62
Deleting one Column 63
Reorganizing Your File (FUNCTION) 64
Sorting the Data 64
Selecting Records 65
Printing the Selected Data 67
Saving the Selected Data on Disk 67
Inserting a Blank Column or Record 68
Deleting the File 68
Editing Tools (EDIT) 70
Adding a New Record 70
Adding a New Label 70
Jumping to the Top or Bottom Record 71
Changing the Width of a Column 72
Loading a File from a Disk 73
Saving the Address Book File on Disk 74
ii

Spreadsheet 75
What is a Spreadsheet? 75
How to Start? 75
If You Want to Retrieve an Old Spreadsheet for further Editing 77
The Spreadsheet Templates 78
How to Finish? 78
Help Menus 78
The Input/Edit Mode 80
The SPREADSHEET INPUT/EDIT Screen 80
Moving Around the Screen 80
The Input Area 81
Entering and Editing Data 82
Alphanumeric Data 83
Format Marks 83
Maximum Length of Alphanumeric Data 84
Numeric Data $4
Direct Numbers 85
Formulas 86
Operators 86
Operands 86
Using Simple Formulas 87
Order of calculation of a formula 89
Maximum Length of a Formula 90
Math Functions 90
What is a Range of Cells? 91
Easy Input of a Range 91
List of Functions 92
The Command Mode 96
Bold 96
Underline 96
Absolute and Relative Addresses 97
Copying a Range of Cells 97
Copying one Cell to Many Other Cells 98
Deleting Rows and Columns 99
Inserting Blank Rows and Columns 100
Moving a Range of Cells 103
Printing a Range 104
Functions Available in the Function Menu 104
Adjusting the Width of the Columns 105
Filling a Range with Numbers 106
Freezing Columns on the Screen 107
Changing the Format of Numeric Data 108
Recalculation 110
Organizing Your Data 111
Clearing a Range 115
Converting a Range 116
File Operations 118
Saving Your Spreadsheet Work 118
Retrieving a Spreadsheet File 119
Making a Copy of a File 119
Deleting a File 120
Renaming a File 121
Converting a Spreadsheet File 121
Printing a File 122
The Templates 124
Description of the Templates 124
Retrieving a Template 125
A Practice Exercise 125
Practice Recalculation 126
iii

Practice Printing 126
From the INPUT/EDIT Screen 126
From the SPREADSHEET INDEX Screen 126
Practice Saving the File 127
Create Document 129

How to Start? 129
If You Want to Retrieve an Old Document for further Editing 129
On-Screen Help Information 129
How to Finish? 130
INPUT/EDIT Screen 131
Scale 131
Message Area 131
Status Line 132
Text Area 132
Function Menu 134
Accelerators 134
Short-cut Keys 134
Typing on the Display 136
Hot Zone 136
Word Wrap 136
Permanent Space 136
Permanent Hyphen 136
Getting Many Different Characters 137
Switching the Keyboard 137
Lowercase and Uppercase Characters 138
Extra Characters 138
Superimposed Characters (Permanent Backspace) 138
Accents ("Dead" Keys) 139
Revising Text — Basic Functions 140
Moving the Text Cursor 140
Cursor Keys 140
GOTO Page 141
Inserting Text 141
Deleting a Character 142
Deleting a Word 142
Deleting a Line 142
Formatting Text — Basic Functions 143
Format Change Symbol 143
Left and Right Margins 143
Setting the Pitch 144
Changing the Line Spacing 144
Tabs and Decimal Tabs 144
Setting Tabs 145
Clearing Tabs 145
Using Tabs while Typing 145
Using Decimal Tabs while Typing 146
Inserting Tabs 146
Removing Tabs 146
Line Indent 147
Paragraph Indent 147
Setting the Temporary Left Margin 147
Using a Temporary Left Margin 147
Returning to the True Left Margin 148
Automatic Justification 148
Entering Justified Text 148
Justifying Existing Text 148
Page Layout View Function 149
Adding Effects (STYLE) t50
Bold Face Characters 150
iv

Underlining
Typing Expanded Text 151
Subscripts and Superscripts 152
Centering and Right Margin Flush (crivRmF) 152
Centering Between Margins 154
Centering Between Tabs 154
Undoing Centering 154
Right Margin Flush 155
155
Undoing a Right Margin Flush Format 156
Block Operations (BLOCK)
157
Copying a Block within the Document 157
Copying a Block into a Different File 158
Recalling the Temporary File 159
Deleting a Block 159
Moving a Block 160
Searching for Text (SEARCH) 162
Search 162
Defining a String 163
Search and Replace 164
Hyphen Scan 165
Spell Check System (SPELL) 167
Understanding the Spell Checker 167
Important Notice 168
Checking Existing Text -- ALL 168
Activating the System 168
While Checking (Suspect & Redundant Words) 169
Checking While Typing -- ONE WORD 171
Activating the System 171
Understanding the User Dictionary 171
User Dictionary Maintenance 172
Using the Function Menu for other Options 173
Loading a User Dictionary 174
Saving the User Dictionary 175
Abbreviated Phrases and Thesaurus (ABBR/THR) 176
Thesaurus 176
Edit Thesaurus 176
Type Thesaurus 178
Increasing Your Typing Speed with Abbreviated Phrases 178
Abbreviated Phrase Maintenance 179
Using the Function Menu for other Options 180
Loading an Abbreviated Phrase File 181
Saving the Abbreviated Phrase Memory 182
Paper and Screen Settings (FORM) 183
Paper Size 183
Header and Footer 185
Disabling the scale 186
Displaying two Documents 187
Switching to the Other Document (When displaying two documents) 188
Returning to Normal INPUT/EDIT Screen (When displaying two docu-
ments) 188
Printing a Page (PAGE) 190
Page Breaks 190
Page Printing 191
File Operations -- Memory 192
Saving Your Work 192
Saving a New File 192
Saving an Edited file 193
Entering a File Name 193
MEMORY INDEX Screen 194
File Length and Remaining Memory Space 194

Selecting a File 194
Functions Available on the MEMORY INDEX Screen 194
Retrieving Previous Work 195
Printing a File in Memory 195
Pausing/Resuming Printing 197
Daisy Wheel Changes (only with Brother HR Series Printers) 197
Double Columns Printing 198
Copying a File in Memory 199
Deleting a File from the Memory 200
Renaming a File in Memory 201
Switching to the DISK INDEX Screen 201
Transferring a File from Memory to Disk 202
Deleting All Files in Memory 203
File Operations -- DISK 204
Copying a File on the Disk 204
Deleting a File from a Disk 205
Renaming a File on Disk 206
Copying a Disk (Back-Up Copy) 206
Switching to the MEMORY INDEX Screen 208
Disk Delete (Deleting All Files) 208
Transferring a File from Disk to Memory 209
Data Merge 210
Creating the Merge File 210
Creating the Master Document 210
Merge Printing 210
Optional Business Letter Template Disk 212
Operation 212
Line by Line 213

Printing a Line at a Time as You Type 213
How to Start? 213
Using the Line by Line Mode 213
How to Finish 213
The LINE BY LINE Screen 214
Text Line 214
Message Area 214
Function Menu 214
Status Line 215
Setting Up 216
Setting Margins 216
Selecting the Pitch 216
Selecting the Line Space 216
Corrections 217
Caps Lock vs. Shift Lock 217
Selecting the Keyboard 218
Permanent Backspace 218
Accents and Special Symbols ("Dead" Keys) 218
Layout Functions 219
Adding Effects (STYLE) 219
Bold Face Characters 219
Underlining 220
Typing Expanded Text 221
Superscripts and Subscripts 222
Centering and Right Margin Flush Functions (ciRiRmF) 223
Centering 223
Right Margin Flush 224
Calculator 225
Using Your Machine like a Pocket Calculator 225
vi

How to Start? 225
From the Main Menu 225
From the Create Document Mode 226
Calculating 226
Order of Calculation 226
Sign 226
Maximum Length of Numbers and Precision 226
Storing a Constant 227
Clearing 227
Turning the CALCULATOR off 227
Clock 229
The Time Clock 229
Turning the CLOCK ON 229
Setting the Time 230
Setting the Alarm 231
Returning to the Main Menu 231
Communication 233
The Communication Mode 233
Before You Start 233
Purchase a Modem 233
If you want to use Information Services 233
How to Start? 234
Communicating 234
How to Finish? 235
The COMMUNICATION Screen 236
The Function Menu 236
Scrolling the Display 237
Dialing 238
Direct Typing of the Dial Command 238
Selecting the Phone Number from the Address Book 239
Dialing and Connection Problems 239
Log in 240
Setting Up 241
Sending a File 244
Receiving a File 246
Returning to the Main Menu 248
Character Code Table 249
8-bit Code Table 249
7-bit Code Table 250
Transmitting Control Codes 251
Fax 253
The FAX Mode 253
Before You Start 253
How to Start? 253
Sending the File 254
How to Finish? 255
The SEND A FAX Screen 256
Entering the Fax Number 256
Direct typing 256
Using the Address Book File 257
Dial Mode 257
Transmitter ID 258
Transmission Problems 258
Printout vs Fax Copy 259
vii

Disk Application 261
The Disk Application Mode 1 261
What is the TETRIS Game? i 261
How to start? 261
Setting the LEVEL and HEIGHT 264
Playing i 265
The Indicators i 266
Other Options 1 266
How to Finish I 266
Appendix 267
Error Messages 267
Troubleshooting Chart 269
Specifications 270
General 270
Printer (Parallel) interface 270
Driver Circuit 271
Receiver Circuit 1 272
Communication (RS-232C) Interface 272
Driver Circuit I 273
Receiver Circuit I 273
Glossary I 274
Alphabetic Index 1 279
Optional Accessories for Your otebook Work Organizer

You may want to consider some f the accessories described below for your
Notebook Work Organizer. See "Accessory Order Form" at the end of this guide
for ordering information.
Floppy Disks (MFD-60)
A box of ten 3.5" single sided/double density (1DD) Floppy Disks.
Touchbase Pocket Fax Modem FX-4000)
machine by using the FX-4000.

able
also
send
a
file
fax
text
to `you
This modem allows you to communicate with another PN-4400 or a personal
computer via telephone lines. are
Business Letter Template Disk ( L-2)

The Business Letter Template isk can help you write business letters quickly
and easily. This disk includes 198 sample business letters, reflecting many
business situations. You can di play the most appropriate letter and then edit
it to suit your purpose.
Rechargeable Ni-Cd Battery (BA-4000)

This battery is used to provide power to the unit when no AC power is avail-
able. (For use outdoors, on a tr ip, etc.) This battery pack fits easily into a
compartment on the top of your nit.
Carrying Case (CA-4000)
This carrying case, with handle, s used to transport your PN-4400 safely.
viii

Getting Started
Precautions
•
•
Never power the machine with an AC adapter other than the AC adapter which
comes with your machine.
In case of malfunction, overheating, or other problems, immediately turn the
power off, disconnect the AC adapter and consult your dealer. Turn the power
off and disconnect the AC adapter during thunderstorms.
Do not attempt to disassemble the machine. It has no user-serviceable parts
inside.
1
• Do not tug on the power cord or connection cables. To disconnect, be sure
to always grasp the plug itself.
• Avoid direct exposure to sunlight and other sources of heat. Be especially
careful not to leave the machine in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight.
The display is vulnerable to high temperature.
Avoid spills. If any liquid enters the machine, immediately turn the power off,
disconnect the AC adapter and consult your dealer. Do not allow foreign
matter to enter the interior of the unit or get between the keys. Be especially
careful of metal objects.
Use the unit ona horizontal, hardsurface. Avoidlocations subject to excessive
vibration, moisture or dust. The display is especially vulnerable to humidity
and can be easily damaged if it is hit or scratched with hard objects. Never
apply undue pressure on the display. Clean with a soft, dry cloth. Avoid using
chemicals, solvents and detergents. Do not use sprays in the vicinity of the
machine. Aerosols are extremely harmful to the disk drive.
Avoid dropping the machine and do not place objects on the keyboard.
To avoid interference, do not place the machine too close to a radio receiver
or television. If the machine is too close to a television set, the disk drive may
not work properly.
• If you switch the machine off, wait at least 10 seconds before switching it on
again. Failure to respect this delaymay disrupt the start-up sequence, resulting
in faulty operation and possible hardware damage.
Rechargeable Battery: Do not try to disassemble and do not dispose of the
battery in a fire. The battery may burst. Avoid short circuits between the
battery terminal and recharge at least once a year even if the battery is not
used. For more details, see "Precautions Regarding the Rechargeable Bat-
tery" on page 7.
• Display: The backlit panel will gradually decrease its brightness as it is used.
To maximize the life of the display, turn the back light off when working in a
well-lit location. Never increase the brightness more than necessary. After
much use the panel may expire. When this occurs, contact your local Brother
service location to have the panel replaced.

Description of the Machine
MAVIS DNILIE
2
5
6
7

(1) LCD Display This two-way backlit LCD screen displays 14 lines of 80
characters. Contrast and back light intensity can be
adjusted separately. The back light can be turned off
for lower power consumption when working with the
battery.
(2) Cover Clamp Press the clamp inward to open.
(3) Rechargeable insert the optional rechargeable battery here. This

Battery Compart- battery allows you to use the machine where AC power
ment is not available.
(4) Keyboard Character and function keys.
(5) Power Input Connect the AC adapter supplied with your machine
here. Never connect another adapter.
(6) Power Switch Turns the machine on/off.
(7) Contrast Control- Controls the display contrast.

ler
(8) Back light Con- Controls the intensity of the back light; cannot be used
troller to turn the back light completely off.
(9) Disk Drive Insert your disks here.
(10) Disk Eject Button Press this button to eject the disk.
(11) Printer Connec- Connect a parallel printer cable here.

tor
(12) Communication This input/output connector is used to connect a serial
Connector printer cable, a modem, or the optional fax interface.
(13) Backup Battery The small lithium battery protects the memory even
Compartment when the power is switched off.

Setting Up
031EIVIS ON11130
Connecting the AC Adapter

• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adapter, make sure that the power
is off. Connecting or disconnecting the AC adapter while the power is on may
damage the memory.
• Never use an AC adapter other than the one which comes with the machine.
Make sure that the power switch is set to OFF.
OFF
Plug the supplied AC adapter into an AC outlet

and plug its cable into the DC9V power input of
the machine.
You may now turn the power ON.
It is a good idea to disconnect the AC plug when the machine is not to be used for
a long period.
Always disconnect the adapter from the AC outlet during thunderstorms.

Inserting the Lithium Battery
The small lithium battery that comes with the machine should be inserted in the
compartment on the bottom of the machine. This battery retains memory and
powers the clock functions when the power switch is turned off.
• This battery is not for using your unit without the AC power adaptor. If you
want to use your unit where AC power is not available, see "Installing a
Rechargeable Battery" on page 6.
• When installing a new lithium battery, make sure that the power is on. Installing
a new lithium battery while the power is off may cause malfunction when you
turn the power on. Making sure that the power is on when you replace the
lithium battery also prevents memory data that cannot be stored on disk (e.g.
settings of the Communication mode, etc.) from being erased.
Connect the AC adapter and make sure that the
power is on.
Use a coin to open the battery compartment cover

at the bottom of the machine.
Make sure that the positive terminal (+) is facing

outside.
Slide the battery into the holder and push it in.
Close the cover.
AID
The battery will last for about one year. When it becomes low, a MemLoss indicator
will appear at the upper-right corner of the screen each time you press a key, and
the Auto Power Off function will be disabled.

When this indicator appears, you should immediately save all your files on a disk.
0318V1S ONIII3D
If you do not do so, there is a risk that the files will be deleted.
Bring the old lithium battery to your supplier and be sure to purchase a new battery
of the same type (CR2032). Insert the new battery as explained above.
Installing a Rechargeable Battery

An optional rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery is available (Brother Battery Pack
BA4000). It allows you to use your machine in places such as a train, where AC
power is not available.
Make sure that the power is turned off.

Open the battery compartment cover on the top
of the machine.
OFF
Insert the battery as shown and press down to

lock. Close the cover.
You may now turn the power on.
To remove the battery, pull the latch toward the

keyboard to unlock. The battery can then be
Latch removed.
Charging the Rechargeable Battery

A new battery must be charged before you can use the machine without the AC
adapter.
To charge the battery, turn the power off, insert the battery pack, and connect the
AC adapter. When the AC adapter is connected, the battery recharges automat-
ically in about 15 hours regardless of the position of the power switch. However,
if the power switch is kept on and you do not use the machine, the battery will
recharge in about six hours. The charging times indicated here may vary depending
on the temperature and AC voltage.
• If the BATTERY indicator stays on for more than ten minutes without
interruption, the battery is worn out and must be replaced with a new
one.
A charged battery will automatically power the machine each time you turn the
power on while the AC adapter is not connected.

A new, fully charged battery will be able to supply power for about 2.5 hours with
the display back light on, and for about eight hours with the back light off (these
times are at room temperature and when the disk drive is not used). As the battery
becomes old, the time it can supply power after being fully charged will decrease.
Replace the battery with a new one when its performance become poor.
When the battery becomes low, the BATTERY indicator appears each time you press
a key. At that time, the battery has not enough energy to power the disk drive and
disk access becomes impossible. You should recharge the battery immediately.
If an AC outlet is not available, or if you do not have the AC adapter handy, switch
the power off and stop using the machine until you can recharge the battery. Failure
to observe this precaution can cause the memory to be cleared.
WARNING: When using the adapter with a rechargeable battery installed,
never disconnect the adapter from the AC outlet or from the machine while
the power is on. This would cut the power supply to the unit even if the battery
is charged. Moreover, doing so could damage the memory.
If you want to disconnect the AC adapter and run the machine with the
rechargeable battery, switch the power off first, disconnect the AC adapter,
and switch the power on.
Precautions Regarding the Rechargeable Battery

• If you are going to use the machine for an extended period with the AC adapter
only, remove the nickel-cadmium battery and store it in a cool, dry place. This
also applies when you are not going to use the machine for an extended period.
Be careful to prevent the battery terminals from contacting metallic pieces (do
not wrap the battery in aluminum foil which would cause a short circuit).
Recharge at least once a year even if the battery has not been used.
Never recharge the battery using a recharger other than the built-in recharger
of your machine.
Do not try to disassemble the battery, or dispose of it in a fire. The battery
may burst.
Switch the power off when you do not use the machine in order to save battery
energy.
Transporting the Machine

This laptop machine is ideal to work on a train or in a park, to take notes in a meeting,
etc. Simply make sure that the rechargeable battery is fully charged and the disks
that you might need have been initialized for use. When the machine runs on the
battery, switching off or reducing the intensity of the back light, as well as avoiding
too much disk operation will extend the battery life.
• Avoid transporting the machine with a disk inserted in the drive. Vibrations
and shocks may damage the disk and the drive, and the disk may fall out if
the eject button is accidentally pressed.

Connecting other Equipment
0311:IVIS MILE
Printer
Before you try to connect a printer, you must know which kind of input connector
the printer is equipped with: parallel or serial (RS-232C). You will find this infor-
mation in the printer documentation. Connect the printer cable accordingly to the
connector on your machine.
• Before connecting the printer to yourmachine, make sure that the powerswitch
on your machine and on the printer in turned to OFF.
Parallel Cable
Printer
Serial Cable
Printer
This machine is compatible with most printers currently available on the market.
In order to work correctly, however, the machine must be told which kind of printer
is connected (refer to "Printer Set Up" on page 22).

Modem and Fax Adapter
Not all external modems and fax adapters available on the market are compatible
with your machine. When you purchase a modem or a fax adapter and a modem
cable (serial), make sure to consult your dealer. The recommended model is
Robotics FX-4000 (Pocket Fax Modem) which can be used both as a modem and
fax adapter. You may also use a HAYES AT compatible modem.
Refer to the modem and fax adapter documentation for setting the jumper con-
nectors and/or DIP switches, if any. Usually, the manufacturer's settings do not
need to be changed.
When you purchase a modem or a fax adapter, it is a good idea to bring the machine
to your supplier's shop and actually try the unit before buying.
• Before connecting a modem or a fax adapter to your machine, make sure that
the power is off.
Connect the serial cable of the modem or fax

adapter to the communication connector of your
machine. Secure the connector screws.
Connect the telephone cable of the modem or fax

adapter to the auxiliary socket of a telephone set
or to a telephone line socket.

oatsON11B0
Connection with another Computer
If you are using a desk top computer for your work at home or in your office, you
will be able to transfer data from your Power Note Work Organizer to your computer
or vice versa. Since disk formats are incompatible, the transfer of text files must
be done through a cable. Your computer must be equipped with an RS-232C serial
port and the appropriate communication software. All you need is a NUL MODEM
cable, available in most computer shops. For details about data transfer, see
"Communication" on page 233.
• Before connecting a computer to your Power Note Work Organizer, make sure
that both machines are switched off.
Connect the NUL MODEM cable to the commu-

nication connectors on both your Brother Power
Note Work Organizer and the computer. Secure
the connector screws.
10

Floppy Disks
This machine accepts only the following types of 3.5-inch floppy disks:
MF-2DD (Double Sided/Double Density/Double Track)
MF-1DD (Single Sided/Double Density/Double Track)

• Your machine cannot use high density ("HD") floppy disks, so be sure to
purchase only double density double track ("DD") disks. It is recommended
that you use Brother brand disks.
Inserting and Removing a Floppy Disk

Insert the floppy disk as shown in the illustration.
You will feel some resistance if you try to insert
the disk the other way around.
To remove the disk, simply press the disk eject

button.
CAUTION -- The floppy disk may be inserted and

removed when the power is either on or off.
However, you should never insert or remove
it while a message indicates that a disk oper-
ation is in progress.
Eject Button
Write-Protecting Your Disks

All 3.5-inch floppy disks have a switch that protects
their contents from accidental erasure. When the
switch is in its READ ONLY position, you cannot
erase old information or store new information on
the disk.
Write/Read
Put the switch in the READ ONLY position to

protect a disk containing valuable information.
Read Only
11

0318V1S NIUE
Caring for Your Disks
Never open the shutter of the disk and never touch

the surface directly.
Do not use magnetic materials near the disk.
Never expose the disk to extremely high or low

temperatures.
10° - 53°C
(50°F - 127°F)
Initializing New Disks

A floppy disk can be used by a system only after being "formatted" -- or initialized
by the system for specific use by that system. The initializing program creates a
format on the disk.
Different systems use different formats. Standards exist, but, in general, systems
cannot share disks without special conversion of hardware or software. This
machine uses a proprietary disk format that is not recognized by any personal
computer or other electronic equipment. It is, however, intelligent enough to rec-
ognize a new disk or one from another system. When you turn on the machine,
for example, one thing that is checked is the disk format. If the disk is unformatted
or has a different format, the following prompt appears:
Initialize? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).
Press to initialize and erase any data on the disk. Press CANCEL if you
decide not to initialize..
12

• WARNING -- Initializing a disk erases any data that might be on it. If you
initialize a disk from a personal computer, for example, the files will be com-
pletely destroyed. Once the disk has been initialized, however, it will be in
the proper format for use with this Brother unit.
• This machine can recognize and read data from disks that have been used
with some Brother word processors. For more details, please contact your
dealer.
Backing up a Disk
The best insurance against losing important data is to make backups (duplicate
copies). You can do this at two levels: at the individual document level with the
COPY function, and at the disk level with the DISK COPY function. (For details, see
"Copying a Disk (Back-Up Copy)" on page 206.)
13

General Features
03/8V1S ONILL3D
The Modes of Operation
Thu September 12 1991 9:18AM
« MAIN MENU »
. . .
1,. .SCREDWAVCALIMP 6. CALCULATOR
2. ADDRESSBOOK 7. CLOCK
3. SPREADSHEET 8. COMMUNICATION
4. CREATE DOCUMENT 9. FAX
5. LINE BY LINE 0. DISK APPLICATION
Type rcumbet- ot' lliove'gifsbrand'OreSt RETURN Presi MENU-for more selections.
When you switch the machine on, a list of "modes" appear on the screen. That list
is called the MAIN MENU and the different modes correspond to the different kinds
of work that can be performed. To start working with a mode, simply press the
corresponding number key (C) for Scheduler/Calendar, etc.), or select with the
cursor keys and press (RETURN . Here is a brief description of the modes:
Scheduler/Calendar In this mode you can prepare your schedule and have
an alarm automatically remind you of an important
appointment, even while you are working with another
mode of the machine. It also provides you with an on-
screen calendar.
Address Book The Address Book mode provides you with an easy way
to input and organize lists of data such as names,
addresses, and telephone numbers. This file can be
used for easy selection of a telephone or fax number in
the Communication and Fax modes. Data can be
merged with document files.
Spreadsheet The Spreadsheet mode is used to create tabulated
documents like financial statements, in which calcula-
tions are automatically performed. Such files can be
converted in order to include the calculated data into a
document.
Create Document This mode is used to create, edit, and format texts. It is
equipped with automatic search, spell checker, paste
and cut, and powerful layout functions.

Line by line In the Line by line, the text that you type, is sent line by
line to the printer. This mode is convenient to print an
envelope or short text that you do not need to keep in
the memory or on disk.
Calculator When you enter this mode, a part of the screen looks
like a pocket calculator and allows for simple arithmetics.
You can call this mode either from the MAIN MENU or
from the Create Document mode. The result can be
automatically inserted into the document you are
working on.
Clock The Clock mode allows you to set the date and time.
The machine will display the date and time on most
screens. A morning alarm can be set.
Communication The Communication mode allows data transfer between
your machine and another computer or communication
service.
Fax With this mode, you can send a document file through
the telephone line to a fax machine.
Disk Application This mode is reserved for application programs that are
available on disks. The famous Russian game TETRIS
is included with your unit.
The Auto Power-off Function

In order to save battery energy and to maximize the life time of the display, this
machine is equipped with a function that will automatically turn the power off if no
key is pressed for more than ten minutes. To switch the power back on, flip the
power switch to OFF, wait ten seconds, and flip the power switch to ON. If you
were editing a Create Document file or a Spreadsheet file, the machine will display
the same file. If you were doing anything else, the MAIN MENU will appear.
• The auto power-off function is temporarily disabled during the following
operations: file transmission in the Fax mode, Communication mode, printing,
disk access, Spell Checker (option ALL) and Search & Replace operations in
the Create Document mode, Disk Application mode, and Self Demo program.
The Time Clock

This machine is equipped with a clock that is powered with the lithium battery when
the power is turned off. Some screens, like the MAIN MENU display both date and
time. Other screens display only the time, but the current date can be seen by
pressing • . The time reappears when that key is released.
15

0318V1S ON11.130
The Memory
The 42 Kbytes memory of this machine is protected with the lithium battery. As
long as the battery is able to supply sufficient power, all the data stored in memory
is safe, even if you switch the power off. In order for you to make the best use of
the memory, and avoid accidental erasure, it is important that you understand what
is stored in the memory.
Two kinds of data are stored in the memory: system parameters, and files that you
create.
• The system parameters (date and time, printer settings, etc.) are always in
memory. When your machine is new, these parameters are set to default
values. The system parameters occupy a fixed amount of memory. There is
no way to clear that space or to transfer the data it contains to a disk.
If the lithium battery becomes low or is removed while the power is off, the
system parameters will return to their default values.
Files that you create are stored in the memory while you create them. If you
switch the power off while working on a Create Document or Spreadsheet file,
the next time you switch the machine on, the file will usually reappear on the
screen. After files are created, they can be saved on disk.
The file you are working on may be lost if the power is cut while an operation
that takes time is in progress. Before you turn the power off, make sure that
the machine is not busy with such a function.
If the lithium battery becomes low or is removed while the power is off, the
files will be erased.
The machine distinguishes three kinds of files:
• Spreadsheet files: A Spreadsheet file is stored in the memory only while you
are working on it. When the file is complete, you can save it only on disk.
• Create Document files: You can have more than one Create Document file
in the memory. When you create a new file, its file name is always *NEWFILE.
When you save the file into the memory, the machine asks you to enter a more
specific file name.
• All other files: All the other files that you can create with this machine are
automatically stored into the memory. These files include:
User Dictionary file (for the Spell Checker)

Abbreviated phrases file (for speeding up typing)
Address Book file
Scheduler/Calendar file
Only one of each of the above four kinds of files can be stored in the memory
at one time.
16

The Display
The LCD screen of this machine can display 14 lines of 80 characters_ Each mode
of operation (Create Document, Communication, etc.) uses a different screen
layout, adapted to the work that is done in that mode, but most screens are con-
sistently divided into three principal regions:
Status Line: The top line of the screen helps you to remember where you
are and which functions are activated. The pieces of information that appear
on the status line are called indicators. For example, in the Create Document
mode, the status line indicates the page, fine, and column number, the name
of the file you are working on, etc. Some indicators appear only when the
corresponding function is activated.
• Work Area: On most screens, the central part of the display is the place
where you can actually input or modify your data.
• Message Area: The bottom of the screen is reserved for messages or prompts
that the machine displays automatically to tell you what to do next. You will
be able to perform most operations by simply following the instructions at the
bottom of the screen.
As an example, the following illustration shows the main screen of the Create
Document mode.
XXXXXXXX P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX KB:X 9:1sAm

L 2 • - 3 4 5 6
I Status Line
Work Area
iez Message Area
Start typing your text. Press SILK to finish.
The Keyboard
This machine has more keys than a common typewriter keyboard. In order to get
a clear understanding of the keyboard, we will distinguish three classes of keys:
character, keyboard control, and function keys. Most keys are auto-repeat; if you
hold down the key, its effect continues to repeat until you release the key.
The Character Keys

The character keys are used to type text. They are very similar to the character
keys of a common typewriter, except that two different "keyboards" are available:
17

standard ASCII keyboard and American keyboard. To switch from one keyboard
0318V/S DNI1130
to the other, press (cooEl ( KEYBOARD,' ). An indicator on the top line of the
screen tells you which keyboard is currently selected (kB:I=ASCII, ke:ii=American).
GRAM 7 PITCH LINE A M REL L. MAR 1 R MAR SET DT SET f T CUR Moms OUT I LINE OUT
I
0 A 0 ( BS
1 4 5 6 7 8 9
TAB Q E R T U 0 SS
PIND > WERT OPERATE PRINT ETURN
APS A S F G H K L ND CLR
SHIFT LOCK AMR CAC SOTO LAYOUT KB ID
SHIFT
X V N SHIFT
IA CODE
‘(=.•
CODE MENU CANCEL
FILE EXPR PRES NEXT S RELOC
The characters available when the keyboard is set to KB:! appear on the left
of the key tops.
The characters available when the keyboard is set to KB:8 appear on the right
of the key tops.
The Keyboard Control Keys

The keyboard control keys are used to modify the effect of the other keys. To
modify the effect of another key, you must hold down ,SHIFT' or cooE while pressing
the key to be modified.
In this guide, such a double keystroke will be symbolized by the "+" sign.
GRAM I PITCH LINE REL 7 L MAR ji R MAR T SET I DT SET E T CLR tNORO OUT LINE OUT
I
111111111L11311111131111111111111111111110
I
TAB
RIND MK a
i C TEMP INSERT PERA E PRINT RETURN
MIAIANX C V111011111111111"
B N
CAR
Iz !RIFT
c,o [1..1
ffi EiXIP7R I PRIS I
NE!Ts
18

SHIFT a character key Hold this key down to type uppercase characters.
The SHIFT indicator appears on the top line of the
screen as long as the sHiFr key is pressed.
CAPS Pressing this key once displays the CAPS indicator.
All letter keys are capitalized. while number keys
remain lower case. Press the same key to unlock
the keyboard. While the CAPS indicator is dis-
played. you may temporarily press SHIFT and a
number key to type characters like "!". "@", etc.
rCODE L SHIFT LOCK ( CAPS ) Pressing these keys once locks the keyboard in
uppercase mode and displays the SHIFT indicator
permanently. Press _SHIFT to release.
CODE + a character key Used to type the character indicated in green on
the key top. or to activate a function.
The Function Keys

The function keys are used to activate the many functions of the machine. Many
functions can be activated with 1 CODE + a character key. Some of these functions
are not indicated in green on the key top but will be explained in the respective
sections of this Guide.
GRAM 1 PITCH Lee I M REL 1 Lon R MAR TNT I DT SET TCLR IWORD OUT LINE OUT
0 BS
1 2 3 4 7 8 9 0
R T O
TBNP INSERT OPERATE PRINT RETURN
C
•
CAPS A 'D F G H J L CLR
SHIFT LOCK AMR arTG HELP LAYOUT L1ID
SHIFT z x B N M SHIFT
CODE
CODE MENU CANCEL 4- 1

FILE PRES NEXT S RELOC
19

031EIVIS 01411130
Some Important Function Keys
An important advantage of your machine is that ail the software it contains has
been designed to ensure optimal consistency in the use of the keyboard. After
learning to use one mode, you will be able to learn each one very quickly.
, and L These are the cursor keys, used to move the

cursor to any desired place on the screen.
RETURN I and ( CANCEL While an operation is in progress. you will often
be requested to confirm or quit. RETURN allows
you to go on and ( CANCEL allows you to go back
to the previous step or escape completely.
Pressing (CANCEL repeatedly when you are lost
will eventually return you to a known situation.
MENU' Pressing MENU, displays a menu of functions. A
function can then be selected using the cursor
keys, and activated by pressing ( RETURN 1. Most
of the functions that are selectable from a menu
can also be activated with "short-cut" keys.
CODE + (HELP ( (HI ) Pressing (cogs) + (HELP displays help information
about the mode you are working with.
E I ( (MENU) )
(CODE) + (- TE- Pressing (coos( (FILEI allows you to finish your
work and save the data.
20

The MAIN MENU
■
The MAIN MENU will appear when you turn the machine on.
Thu September 12 1991
<< MAIN MEND

1:.scwuLEttipgieNpAR E. CALCULATOR
2. ADDRESSBOOK '7. CLOCK
5. LINE BY LINE 0. EIS., APPLICATION
Type number or mo curtor and,,press RETURN. Press bwai for more selections.
To start working, move the cursor to the desired mode using the cursor keys and
press i ETURN ]. You may also type the number corresponding to the mode ("1" for
SCHEDULER/CALENDAR, etc.).
• Before you start working with any mode, we suggest that you have a look at
the following sections for additional options.
Switching the Display Back CODE
Light ONEOFF
BAC I N/OFF PRINTER SET UP PASSWORD SELF DEMO
BACKLIT ON
When you run your machine on the battery, it is a good idea to switch the back light
of the screen off in order to reduce power consumption.
1. Press MENU to display the function menu. The cursor is located on BACKLIT
ON/OFF and an indicator displays the status of the back light on the upper-right
corner of the screen. Any keystroke deletes that indicator.
2. Use E and CD to move the cursor to BACKLIT ON/OFF and press (RETURN If
the back light was on, it is now off, and vice versa.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "B".
• Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2) you may press ÷ Es .
21

Q3IHVIS ONI1130
Printer Set Up
BACKLIT OAN ,OFF PRINTER SET UP PASSWORC. SKI._ DEMO
You should confirm the printer settings before you try to print anything. Your
machine is compatible with many printers, but requires to be told what kind of printer
is connected, and on which connector.
Selecting the Printer

1. Press MENU, to display the function menu.
2. Use C) and to move the cursor to PRINTER SET UP and press (RETURN . The
first page of PRINTER SET UP screen appears:
« PRINTER SET UP » 9:18AM
PRINTER MtcithiriliegrOihflarMATAXX-sERINTER
Brother 24 pin DOT MATRIX PRINTER
Brother HR DAISY WHEEL PRINTER
Brother HL or HP LASER PRINTER
Epson 9 pin DOT MATRIX PRINTER
Epson 24 pin DOT MATRIX PRINTER
IBM - 9 pin DOT MATRIX PRINTER
IBM 24 pin DOT MATRIX PRINTER
other
Use cursor to-selveU& :teas RETURN...::

.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "P".

• Short cut: There is no short-cut key for this function.
3. Use CD and fl to select the appropriate printer, and press IRETuRf41 to display
the second page of the PRINTER SET UP screen.
The PRINTER setting allows you to choose what is called a printer "driver". A printer
driver is a software interface that processes the data from your files into a "standard"
printer format before sending it through the printer cable. Most printers are equipped
with one or several "emulations" that will accept and respond to the incoming data
at print time.
With its nine different drivers, your machine is compatible with a wide range of
existing and future printers -- even printers that are not listed by name on the next
table. In order to find the correct match between your machine and your printer,
proceed as follows:
• If your printer is listed on the PRINTER column of the next table, simply set
PRINTER to the corresponding mode on the MODE column.
For example, if you own a Brother HR40, set PRINTER to Brother HR DAISY
WHEEL PRINTER.
22

if your printer is not listed on the PRINTER column, consult the printer's
documentation to find out which emulation it is equipped with. Find that
emulation on the EMULATION column and set PRINTER to the corresponding
mode on the MODE column. If your printer has more than one emulation, it
must be switched to one of the emulations listed in the EMULATION column.
For example, the Brother HL-8 PS Laser Printer includes two emulations (HP
LASERJET PLUS and BR SCRIPT). HP LASERJET PLUS is listed in the
EMULATION column. Set PRINTER to Brother HL or HP LASER PRINTER
and select the HP LASERJET PLUS emulation on the printer.
Selecting the correct PRINTER mode

MODE EMULATION PRINTER
Brother 9 pin DOT PRINTER IBM PROPRINTER XL M1209
(9 pin) XL500
M1309
XL1000
M1709L
Brother 24 pin DOT PRINTER IBM PROPRINTER XL24E XL1500
(24 pin) M1324
XL2000
M1724L
M1824
Brother HR DAISY WHEEL DIABLO630 HR40
PRINTER DIABLO PRINTER
Brother HL or HP LASER HP LASERJET PLUS HL4
PRINTER HL8
HP LASERJET II
HP LASERJET II
PLUS
HP LASERJET III
Epson 9 pin DOT PRINTER Epson FX Series FX850
LX810
KX-P1180 (Panas-
onic)
Epson 24 pin DOT PRINTER Epson LQ Series LQ510
LQ850
KX-P1124 (Panas-
onic)
IBM 9 pin DOT PRINTER IBM PROPRINTER XL IBM PROPRINTER
XL
IBM 24 pin DOT PRINTER IBM PROPRINTER XL24E IBM PROPRINTER
XL24E
BJ-10c (Canon)
other TTY (without backspace) (IF-20 + EM-1050
etc.)
23

• Depending on yourprinter, a few characters may notprint correctly. The paper
0318V1S DRUB
may also not feed the expected amount.
• Since it is not possible to check the operation of every printer on the market.
some problem may arise with your printer if it does not emulate the named
printer exactly.
When a Brother dot-matrix printer is used, make sure that the emulation is set
to the IBM mode. For example, the XL500 has two emulation modes (IBM
and EPSON), although only the default setting is shown on the above table.
If the printer happens to be in EPSON mode, be sure to reset it to the IBM
mode before printing.
• Brother 9 pin mode is the default setting for A41724L/XL2000. Select the
EPSON emulation mode if you want to use these printers in 24 pin mode.
• With some printers, the amount of paper advance when a sheet is inserted
may be slightly wrong. This problem can be corrected by changing the paper
size in the Create Document mode. For details, see "Paper Size" on page
183,
• Some characters may not print correctly if you select the micron pitch
(PITCH:15).
• If the printer that you own does not appear on the list, select Other. You will
be able to print only basic text (no bold, underline, super/sub scripts, etc.).
Setting the Printer Parameters

When you press t RETURN on the first page of the PRINTER SET UP screen, a
second page appears.
9:18AM
« PRINTER SET UP »
PRINTER SIZE NARROW

QUALITY LQ
CONNECTOR PARALLEL
Press SPACE to change-Setting. Press T to finiSh.
1. Used and 0 to select a parameter, and press (SPACE BAR)] to set the value.
2. Press ERETURN to register your settings, or ftmce,..) to restore the old setting.
to both cases, you will be back on the MAIN MENU.
24

Printer parameters
Parameter Options
PRINTER SIZE NARROW
WIDE
QUALITY NLQ(LQ) (Near Letter Quality)
DRAFT
CONNECTOR Parallel (printer connector)
Serial (communication connector)
When RS232C is selected
BAUD RATE 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
PARITY NONE
Odd
Even
DATA BITS 8bits
7bits
STOP BITS 1 bit
2 bits
Password
BACKLIT ON/OFF PRINTER SET UP SELF DEMO
CHANGE PASSWORD
CANCEL PASSWORD
a password, nobody will be able to read or modify your data. Any time
If you set
a mode other than Clock, Type, or Calculator is selected from the MAIN MENU,
the machine will ask the password and deny access if the password is not correct.
• While entering a password, you may useEl , (WEI + 17;:ta.10..!tie (cc),
(0), (m), or ► + ( ) to edit.
1. Press to display the function menu.
2. Press tEg3I + ffiRE + t to display the PASSWORD submenu.
The three options of the submenu are used as follows:
• SET PASSWORD: For setting your first password. This option cannot be used
to replace an old password with a new one.
• CHANGE PASSWORD: For replacing an old password with a new one. This
option cannot be used if no password has been previously entered.
• CANCEL PASSWORD: For cancelling the password.
25

To Set a Password
031O19 0N11130
1. Use (iD and a) to select SET PASSWORD and press (RETURN . The machine
asks you to enter the password.
• Accelerator: Instead of (1) you may type "S".
2. Type the password using only standard English alphabet characters and press
REIVRN to enter the password, or (cANce. to quit.
To Change a Password
1. Use CD and Cip to select CHANGE PASSWORD and press RETURN r. The machine
asks you to enter the old password.
• Accelerator: Instead of (1) you may type "C".
2. Type the old password and press CIWURN J. The machine asks you to enter
a new password.
3. Type the new password and press
To Cancel a Password
1. Use EEI and CD to select CANCEL PASSWORD and press ( RETURN J. The machine
asks you to enter the old password.
• Accelerator: Instead of (1) you may type "I.".
2. Type the old password and press LRETURN . The old password is cancelled.
• Each time you are requested to enter the password, you may press icoDE)
r:SHIFT, + E to display the password. This feature ensures that you can use
your machine evenifyou forgetyourpassword. It also means thatany owner
of the same model Brother machine knows how to determine your
password.
Self-Demonstration CODE
JUST
BACKLIT ON/OFF PRINTER SET UP PASSWORD ILLMO
This program shows you examples of what you will be able to do with your Power
Note.
1. Press to display the function menu.
26

2. Use E and a- ) to move the cursor to SELF DEMO and press CRETIANJ. The
GETTING STARTED
program starts.
Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "0".
Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press + (letter "0').
3. First comes a short description of the features. After reading a page, press
IRE-ru+J to see the next page, or (` >i. to return to the first page. You may
also press (cam + ( (MENU) ) to return to the MAIN MENU.
4. On the last page of the presentation, the machine asks you to set the printer
in order to print a copy of the presentation. Set the printer and press IREWRP1J,
or press [CANCEL ] to restart the demonstration. You may also press tcoDE3 +
( "MENU ) to return to the MAIN MENU.
5. When printing is complete (or cancelled), a graphic demonstration starts on
the screen. Press or + ( ) to return to the MAIN
MENU.
27

031EIVIS DNI1199
28

Scheduler / Calendar
The Scheduler I Calendar Mode

The Scheduler/Calendar is used to prepare and revise your daily schedule. You
input the items of your schedule on a DAILY screen. You can give that day a title
to remind you of an important event for the day. You can also set alarms in order
to be automatically reminded of important events. A MONTHLY screen allows you
to visualize all the titles entered in the DAILY screen for one month. A CALENDAR
screen displays a six-month calendar for any year between 1940 and 2099.
Before you start...

The Scheduler/Calendar mode assumes that the clock is correctly set. If this is not
the case, go to the Clock mode and set the time and date correctly.
How to Start?
1. Switch the machine on to display the MAIN MENU.
« MAIN MENU »
• • ..
4,4; SCHEDULFIV. . 6. CALCULATOR
5. LINE BY LINE C. DISK APPLICATION
sor'and'Oreiss .RETURN. moria .ieleOtibbE•
2. Move the cursor to 1. SCHEDULER/CALENDAR using the cursor keys and press
. The MONTHLY screen corresponding to today's date appears. The
month displayed will be correct only if you have set the date correctly in the
Clock mode.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "1".
29

The MONTHLY Screen
SCHEDULE KB:X MEMORY:XX.XK
September 1991 9:22AM
Sun : Mon : Tue : Wed : Thu : E7r. : Sat
1/ : 2/ : 3/ : 4/ : 5/ : 6/ : 7/
8/ : 9/ :10i :11/ :12/ :13/ :14/
15/ :16/ :17/ :18/ :19/ :20/ :21/
22/ :23/ :24/ :25/ :26/ :27/ :28/
29/ :30/ : / : / : : / .•
ilVON31V38311103HOS
Tkesi -14..TIlk to7,41-€1.01iiwirtlleA4ilyscren, ot"Atri7o0 ILA'too nithr.: --,
The MONTHLY screen displays a one-month schedule and can be used for setting
holidays, deleting a daily schedule, or switching to the CALENDAR screen. For
details about operations on the MONTHLY screen, see:
• "The MONTHLY Screen" on page 40
How to Enter a Daily Schedule?
Data input is not possible on the MONTHLY screen. To input a daily schedule,
move the cursor to that day on the MONTHLY screen, and press e RETURN I. The
DAILY screen appears.
The DAILY Screen
TITLE: :^ KB:X Wed Sep 4 1991 9:22AM

6:00AM 12:00PM
:30 :30
7:00 1:00
:30 :30
8:00 2:00
:30 :30
9:00 3:00
:30 :30
10:00 4:00
:30 :30
11:00 00
:30 5!38
reid'COMP 7ito...dicoliDer:moniliiy..:.e.teerti, .:25-r
The DAILY screen is divided into entry fields for each half hour of the day. You
can move the cursor to an entry field and enter data such as appointments,
meetings, etc. On the top of the screen, you have a special TITLE entry field where
you can input the indication that will appear on the MONTHLY screen for that day.
You can also set alarms at selected times of the day. For details about operations
on the DAILY screen, see:
• "The DAILY Screen" on page 32
30

How to Go from one Screen to Another?
As mentioned above, the Scheduler/Calendar mode has three different screens:
DAILY, MONTHLY, and CALENDAR. To switch from one screen to another, use
the following keys:
From MONTHLY to DAILY ( RETURN 1 (on a selected day)

From MONTHLY to CALENDAR (cobEl c
From DAILY to MONTHLY (CODE + 51i or CODE ,1 RETURN
From DAILY to CALENDAR (cocel + (di

From CALENDAR to DAILY ( RETURN ) (on a selected day)
From CALENDAR to MONTHLY Not possible
•
How to Finish? CODE MENU
FILE
To exit the Scheduler/Calendar mode and return to the MAIN MENU, simply press
[coos] + (FILE ( (MENU ) from the DAILY, MONTHLY, or CALENDAR screens.
31

The DAILY Screen
77TZE: ice :X Wec: Ser. 4 1991 9:.22Aiv;

6:00AM :2:00Pr/:
:3C :30
):0C 1:0°
:30 :2C
8:00
:30
liVON31VO,B311103HOS
9:00 3:00
:30 .3C
10:00 4:00
: 20
11:32 : 0.0
:30 :30
Awe- data-; Prsa CODE+RETURN td display monthly screen. or FILE tcyfinish.—
This screen is used to enter or edit the schedule of a single day, and to set alarms.
Moving the Cursor

You can move the cursor from one entry field to the next, from one range of hours
to the next, or even to the next or previous day.
a, 0 Moves the cursor vertically one position in the direction
of the arrow. If you move the cursor to an empty field,
it goes to the beginning of the field.
0, Moves the cursor horizontally one position in the
direction of the arrow. The cursor does not move
horizontally on an empty field, and it does not move
from the left column to the right or vice versa.
CODE (Expa ) Moves the cursor to the beginning of the entry field.
(0) Moves the cursor to the end of the entry field.
(RETURN Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next entry field.
Selects the next range of hours in a cyclic:way.
+ :NEXTS1 ( O ) Displays the next day.
TcoDE + PRES) ( FA) Displays the previous day.
Entering or Editing Data

The DAILY screen allows for scheduling a whole day. However, since only half a
day can be displayed at a time, the machine divides the day into three displayable
ranges of hours, from 12:00AM to 11:30AM, from 6:00AM to 5:30PM, and from
12:00PM to 11:30PM. When you enter this screen, the central range is always
displayed. To display another range, see "Moving the Cursor" on page 32.
32

A total of 31 days can be scheduled. If you want to schedule more days, this
message appears:
Date fuLl. Delete the pas_. Press RETUR yes Of CANCEL(n ).
Press ( RETURN to delete all the scheduled days before the present day, or press
(CANCEL ) to exit. The present day corresponds to today's date, not to the currently
selected day. If you press ( CANCEL , you will have to delete manually some
scheduled days. For details about deletion, see "Deleting Scheduled Days" on
page 35.
• The memory can become full during data input, even when you have less than
31 scheduled days. In that case, you should save some Create Document
files on disk and delete them from the memory. This will create more room
for your Scheduler/Calendar file.
You can enter two kinds of data:
• Title: The data that you enter on the entry field TITLE will appear on the
MONTHLY screen. This field is limited to ten characters.
• Events: You can enter an appointment in any entry field, for example, in front
of 6:30, "Airport".
To enter data:
1. Move the cursor to the desired entry field using F and
2. Type the data.
Here is a list of the keys that you can use to enter or edit data:
Character keys To type the data.

(Bs) Deletes one character to the left.
(copC WORD OUT Deletes one word.
CODE j ( LINE O Deletes an entry field.
,CODE ) INSERT) Switches the insert mode onfoff.
(CODE + To enter superimposed characters.
(CODE + ( KEYBOARD To switch the keyboard.
Dead keys To enter accented letters.
33

Setting an Alarm CODE A
ABBR
0
A total of five alarms can be set. If you try to set an additional alarm, this message
will appear:
Alarm full. Delete unnecessary settings.

8VON311(0 831f103HOS
To set or cancel an alarm:

1. Move the cursor to the time that you want to set and press (cope; + O. An
exclamation mark will appear at the left side of the time.
2. Proceed the same way to cancel an alarm.
• An alarm is not automatically cancelledafterit has soundedor after you delete
the data of the corresponding day. Since only five alarms can be set, you may
need to manually cancel an alarm after it is no longer needed.
If you delete all data, all alarms are cancelled.
When an alarm time arrives, a beep will sound for 20 seconds and a message like
this will appear:
Thu September 12 1991 12:OOPM

Alarm time. < SCHEDULER >
« MAIN 12:00PM
Press CANCEL to exit.
1. SCHEDULER/CALENDAR
2. ADDRESSBOOK A0014.1fikat,: -
3. SPREADSHEET B. COMMUNICATION
for . selecti:O677
If the machine is busy with some processing, like sorting, or disk access, when the
alarm time arrives, the alarm will sound after processing is complete. If the power
has been turned off, it will be automatically turned on, and the message will appear
on top of the main menu.
34

Using the Function Menu
Printing the DAILY Screen CODE P

PRINT
V •
AIRr CALENDAR DELETE MONTHLY GOTO SEARCH SCREEN
1. While viewing the DAILY screen, press MENU to display the function menu.
2. Use ( ) and 0 to select PRINT and press IRETUFIN to start printing.
• Short cut: Instead of (1), and (2), you may press
3. During printing, you may press to stop printing.
Switching to the CALENDAR Screen •••

CODE
PRINT CALEND DELETE MONTHLY GOTO SEARCH SCREEN
While viewing the DAILY screen, press NEM to display the function menu.
2. Use CD and CD to select CALENDAR and press ;RETURN ). A six-month calendar
containing the day of the DAILY screen appears.
• Short cut: Instead of (1), and (2), you may press
Deleting Scheduled Days
PRINT CALENDAR IrtR OOTO SEARCH SCREEN

1ELE CORIUT
'DELETE RECORDS UP TO TODAY'S DATE
DELETE ALL RECORDS
You may delete the current day, all previous days, or all days.
1. While viewing the DAILY screen, press to display the function menu.
35

2. Use 0 and to select DELETE and press Caetuam or J to display the sub-
menu.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "D".
3. To delete the schedule of the current day (the day the cursor is on), select
DELETE CURSOR DATE and press ( RETURN ;
• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press (cooE, to delete
the current day.
OCIN31VOII31103HOS
4. To delete the schedule of all days before the current one (today's date), select
DELETE RECORDS UP TO TODAY'S DATE and press RETURN )
• Accelerator: Instead of (4) you may type "R".
5. To delete all scheduled days, select DELETE ALL RECORDS and press ( RETURN ).
• Accelerator: Instead of (5) you may type 'A".
6. Whatever your selection on the submenu, this message will appear:
Delete? Press RETURN (yes) or CANCEL (no) .
7. Press (' to delete or to return to the DAILY screen without

deleting.
Switching to the MONTHLY Screen CODE M

M CODE
V
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE MTHLY. GOTO SEARCH SCREEN
While viewingrthe DAILY screen, press t NU to display the function menu.

2. Use 0 and 0 to select MONTHLY and press to display the MONTHLY
screen. The cursor will be on the date of the DAILY screen.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "M".
• Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press ÷ CD or ccoE) +
kaLra,...kp
36

Jumping to Another Month k
CODE G
GO TO
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE MONTHLY SEARCH SCREEN
. While viewing the DAILY screen, press TOW to display the function menu.
2. Use E and CD to select GOTO and press IRETURN ) to display this message:
Type number. Press RETURN to display the designated month.

MONTH:0 YEAR:
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "G".

• Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press ▪ (GOTO ( D ).
3. Type the month and year. Use and Ee
to move the cursor from one entry
field to another. Use a to delete a field.
4. Press . The first day of the designated month and year will be dis-
played.
• To display the next or previous day, you may also use =C , DE + (Tnes1 (D)
and (-CODE ÷ 1-NEXTO, ).
Searching
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE MONTHLY GOTO SCREEN
You may either search for the date which contains a specified title or event, or for
the closest date which has been scheduled.
• Searching for specified data

1. While viewing the DAILY screen, press (MENU] to display the function menu.
2. Use EE and Ci) to select SEARCH and press to display this message:
Type search word(s). Press RETURN to start search.

SEARCH:0
37

• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "F?".
3. Type the word(s) you want to search for. Use gi,( 1+ (j)
or (000E1 + UNE OUT j ( 2) to delete.
4. Press RETURN', to start searching. The machine starts searching from the
current cursor position. When the specified word(s) are found, this message
appears:
RON31VO HifIGHOS
Press RETURN to search again, or press CANCEL to stop search.
5. Press RN to search again or to stop searching.

6. If the word cannot be found, this message appears:
i Word(s) not found.
Searching for scheduled days
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE MONTHLY GOTO BMW SCREEN
1. While viewing the DAILY screen, press c irf) to display the function menu.
2. Use and EE to select SEARCH and press diT4 ".:4°, to display this message:
@
SEARCH:I

3. Instead of typing, press MgE + ( ) to search backwards, or
+ C2-713 ( ) to search forwards. The DAILY SCHEDULE screen for the
closest day that contains any scheduled data will be displayed. If there is no
data, this message will appear:
Schedule not found.
38

Selecting the Range of Hours CODE
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE MONTHLY GOTO SEARCH

ry *TIT, -silvz3OPM .
i2:00PM-11:30PM1
:2: 00AM-11: 30AM
1. While viewing the DAILY screen, press (totuiv to display the function menu.
2. Use 0 and CD to select SCREEN and press ( RETURN ) or 1 to display the
submenu.
3. Use and 0 to select the range of hours and press L RETURN to display it.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "6", "P"; or "A".
• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press CODE 4- D to display
the ranges in a cyclic way.
39

The MONTHLY Screen
SCHEDULE MEMORY:XX.XK 9:22AM

September 1991
Sun : Mon Tue .
- Wed - Thu : Fri Sat
1/ : 2/ : 3/ : 4/ : 5/ : 6/ : 7/
8/ : 9/ :10/ :11/ :12/ :13/ :14/

8VON31VO8311103HOS
15/ :16/ :17/ :18/ :19/ :20/ :21/
22/ :23/ :24/ - :25/ :26/ :27/ :28/
29/ :30/ : / / : / : /
Press RETURN to die la' the dail ' screen cr' reas TILICto finiah..
This screen is used to have a look at a whole scheduled month. You cannot enter
data on this screen. Only the titles entered on the DAILY screens are displayed
here.
Moving the Cursor

You can move the cursor from one day to the next, or from one month to the next
or previous one.
Moves the cursor one day in the direction of the arrow.
+ rN S ) Displays the next month.
+ (PREs) ( Q ) Displays the previous month.
Switching to the DAILY Screen

RETURN
CLR
To display a daily schedule, move the cursor to the desired day and press
The DAILY screen of the selected day will appear.

Printing the MONTHLY Screen CODE A
PRINT
J
AnatrL CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY GOTO SEARCH DISK SAVE
While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press LMENtr to display the function
menu.
2. Use E and C) to select PRINT and press (RETURN to start printing.
• Short cut: Instead of (1), and (2), you may press (CODE' PRINT. (11-' )•
3. During printing, you may press CANCEL; to stop printing.
Switching to the CALENDAR Screen CODE
PRINT ,CALENDAR. DELETE HOLIDAY GOTO SEARCH DISK SAVE
While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press (MENU) to display the function
menu.
2. Use @J and 0 to select CALENDAR and press ("RETURN ) A six-month calendar
screen appears.
• Short cut: Instead of (1), and (2), you may press :COW
Deleting Scheduled Days
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY GOTO SEARCH DISK SAVE

.DELETE_ AZURSOR. UWE. • , ,
:.DELETE RECORDS UP TO TODAY'S DATE
-DELETE ALL RECORDS
You may delete the current day, all the previous day, or all days.
41

1. If you want to delete a designated day, first position the cursor on that day. If
you want to delete all scheduled days or all the days up to the current day,
skip this step.
2. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press to display the function
menu.
3. Use E and E to select DELETE and press f ileum:) or GE) to display the sub-
menu.
Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "D".
,Elq'ON31VOE131(103HOS
4. To delete the schedule of the designated day (the day the cursor is on), select
DELETE CURSOR DATE and press J.
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press (0O0k) MI) to delete
the designated day.
5. To delete the schedule of all days before the current one (today's date), select
DELETE RECORDS UP TO TODAY'S DATE and press arME.
6. To delete all scheduled days, select DELETE ALL RECORDS and press RETURN
• Accelerator: Instead of (6) you may type 'A".
7. Whatever your selection on the submenu, this message will appear:
Delete? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).
8. Press fi'4A to delete or CPANc 1 to return to the MONTHLY screen without

deleting.
Setting Holidays CODE 0

JUST
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE GOTO SEARCH DISK SAVE
. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press d to display the function

menu.
2. is
Use and OB to select HOLIDAY and press Oi] 11.42,0 . This message will appear:
Press SPACE to set holiday(s) and press RETURN to exit.
42

Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "O"
Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press IcoDE +
3. To set a single day, position the cursor on that day. To set all of a particular
day, all Saturdays, for example, position the cursor to that day on the top line
of the monthly calendar. When a day is set as a holiday, HOLIDAY
appears on
the screen.
4. Use • (SPACE BAR) to switch the holiday on/off.
5. Repeat steps (4) and (5) if necessary, then press RETURN , to return to the
MONTHLY screen.
Jumping to Another Month CODE G

GO TO
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY €41OTO SEARCH DISK SAVE
. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press L14E-NU, to display the function
menu.
2. Use CD and CD to select GOTO and press to display this message:
Type number. Press RETURN to display the designated month.

MONTH:O YEAR:
Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "G".

Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press toopE) + GO TO ( ).
3. Type the month and year. Use l and E
to move the cursor from one entry
field to another. Use t to delete a field.
4. Press (RETURN to display the month of the designated year.
To display the next or previous month, you may also use 4- (PRES' (0)
and ,cODE) + ( Q ).
43

Searching
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY GOTC Ca, DISK SAVE
You may either search for the date which contains a specified title or event, or for
the closest date which has been scheduled.
DON31Y3 831f103HOS
• Searching for specified data

1. Since the machine searches forward, move the cursor to a position before the
dates that you want to explore.
2. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press f 4f to display the function
menu.
3. Use E and @J to select SEARCH and press t RETURN') to display this message:

SEARCH:I

4. Type the word(s) you want to search for. Use rte,CKM:1 + WORD OUT (CD)
or (coljC + uN ( ) to delete.
5. Press EAETURN1 to start searching. The machine starts searching from the
cursor current position. When the data is found, the DAILY screen with the
specified data appears, with this message.
6. Press C@; -.J to search for another occurrence of the word or to

stop searching.
7. If the word cannot be found, this message appears:
Word(s) not found.
44

• Searching for scheduled days
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY GOTO SEARCH DISK SAVE
1. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press (MENU) to display the function
menu,
2. Use F and 0 to select SEARCH and press ( RETURN ) to display this message:

SEARCH:E

3. Instead of typing, presses + (PRE SI, ( J ) to search backwards, or MDE GC
$ ( LJ ) to search forwards. The DAILY SCHEDULE screen for the
closest day that contains any scheduled data will be displayed. If there is no
data, this message will appear:
Schedule not found.
Loading a Scheduler/Calendar File CODE L

from the Disk L IND
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY GOTO SEARCH til"SOt SAVE
1. Insert the disk containing the file you wish to use.

2. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press C UJ to display the function
menu.
3. Use 0 and 0 to select DISK and press ( REM to display the DISK INDEX
screen.
45

« DISK INDEX » REMAIN:XXX.XK SHIFT 9:22AM
TEXT1 1-7,, ,,27(10t.N3 TEXT2 (XX.X) TEXTS (XX.X)

ADDRESSl.MRG (XX.X) ADDRESS2.MRG (XX.X) SCHEDULE.DTB (XX.X)
- Seledt'a file and press MENU :Press CANCEL far SCREDULER,CALENDAR7
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "K".

• Short cut: There is no short cut for this function.
EIVON31V08311103H3S
4. Use the cursor keys to select a Scheduler/Calendar file (extension .DTB).

5. Press (MENU.) to display the function menu.
COPY DELETE RENAME DISK COPY DISK DELETE LOAD
6. Use and 0 to select LOAD and press (RETuRN). This message will appear:
Erase current file and load file from disk? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).
• Accelerator: Instead of (6) you may type "L".

• Short cut: Instead of (5) and (6), you may press CODE) ÷
Since you can have only one Scheduler/Calendar file in the memory, loading
a file from disk will delete the current file in memory.
7. Press (:-&ETu N.) to load, or CcAKEL) if you do not want the current file to be
deleted from the memory.
After the file is loaded, press (CANCEL') to view the loaded file.
Saving the Current File on Disk CODE

c
S
CALC
PRINT CALENDAR DELETE HOLIDAY GOTO SEARCH DISK AVE
Insert the disk you wish to save your Scheduler/Calendar file on.
2. While viewing the MONTHLY screen, press to display the function
menu.
3. Use 0 and 0 to select SAVE and press flETURN1 to display this message:
46

rrype filename and press RETURN:-
IFILENAME:

• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press (CODEj +Ct.
4. Type the file name and press RETURN . The extension .DTB is automatically
added to the file name.
47

The CALENDAR Screen
1991 9:22AM
January February March
.
1 2 3 4 5 2 31 1 2
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
8YCIN31V08311103HOS
April May June

1 2 3 4 5 6 ' 2 3 4 3C 1
7 6 9 10 11 12 13 5 6 7 A 9 10 11 2 ",. 4 5 6 8
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 10 13 14 15
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 77 29 29
1-4645ITTURN-t0 ditsPIWt edeilyr4breen.: - :To start printing, press PRIN1%
The CALENDAR screen displays a six-month calendar. You may view the CAL-
ENDAR screen by selecting CALENDAR from the menu available on the DAILY or
MONTHLY screen.
• To return to the DAILY screen, move the cursor to the desired day and press
( ,RETURNTj.
• To display the previous or next six-month calendar, use (;CODE PRE S) (0)
and '-coDE) + c s: Tri
• To print the displayed calendar, press ,PRINT ) ( CD ). You can then
press to stop printing.
48

Address Book
The Address Book Mode

The Address Book mode is used to input and organize data such as a list of names,
addresses, telephone and fax numbers. Each entry is called a record and will be
displayed as a single row divided into several items. On the top of the list, labels
identify each item. The list can be edited, sorted, and printed. Parts of the list can
be selected according to specific conditions, and saved as a different file.
How to Start?
Thu September 12 1991 9:18kM
« MAIN MENU »
1. SCHEDULER/CALENDAR 6. CALCULATOR
ADDRESSBOOK ' 7. CLOCK
Type dumber move cursor and press-.RETURN. Press MEND for more selections.
2. Move the cursor to 2. ADDRESSBOOK using the cursor keys and press RETURN
If the Address Book file is empty, the DATA INPUT screen appears. If the file
contains some data, the ADDRESS BOOK screen appears.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type '2".
The DATA INPUT Screen

ADDRESS RECORD:XXX KB:XX MEMORY:X.XK 9:22AM
LAST NAME
TFLEPHONE
FAX NO.
TITLE
COMPANY
AnDRP,qs
CITY
„STATE
ZIP
e'data Press CODEOIETURN to display view screen, or FILE to. finish.
49

The ADDRESS BOOK Screen
ADDRESS KE:X MEMORY:X.XK 9:22AM
:1. :2. :3. :4. :5.
:LAST NAME :FIRST NAME :TELEPHONE :FAX NO.. :TITLE
:Anderson :John :231-63E,-7520 : .
:Bennet :William :123-432-753C • .
:Higgins :Joyce :429-342-6754 .
•
.Retype label. name, move cursor. Press RETURN to enter data, or FILE to l ti.
• The file name displayed in the upper-left corner of the screen will always be
ADDRESS when you are working with a new file. If you save the file on disk or
load a file from disk, the file name that you gave to the file will be displayed
instead of ADDRESS.
In order to work with a file that is stored on a disk, save the current file on a disk
and load another Address Book file from the disk. Since you can have only one
Address Book file in the memory, loading a file from a disk will automatically delete
.33 the current file. For details, see:
rn
• "Saving the Address Book File on Disk" on page 74
to
oa • "Loading a File from a Disk" on page 73
O
O
Creating and Editing an Address Book File
The DATA INPUT screen allows you to add a new record, or to edit the contents
of an old one. This screen appears first when you start with an empty file. After
typing or editing the items of a record, press (coos] +1IND CIA ( RETURN , ) to switch
to the ADDRESS BOOK screen.
The ADDRESS BOOK screen does not allow for direct input of new data. You may
however edit the data in several ways. You can edit the labels, change the width
of the columns, perform block operations, insert blank records, sort the file and
select records. For more details about these operations, see:
• "The Address Book Screen" on page 54
• "Block Operations" on page 60
• "Reorganizing Your File" on page 64
• "Editing Tools" on page 70
At any moment, you can print the file, save it, or load another file from a disk. For
details about file operations, see:
• "Printing the Address Book File" on page 56
• "Loading a File from Disk" on page 73
• "Saving the Address Book File on Disk" on page 74
50

FILE
From the ADDRESS BOOK screen, simply press cir:fix) + (FILE; ( (MENU; ) to return
to the MAIN MENU. Since you can have only one Address Book file in the memory,
the machine will save the file immediately, without asking for a file name.
NEMilIMIIMII
51

The DATA INPUT Screen
ADDRESS RECORD:XXX KE:XX MEMORY:X.XK 5:22AM

TAST NAME
Prp5;9" NAMF
T='LFPHONF
;'AX.. NO.
TITLE
COMPANY
ADDR.P..q
cITY
.STATE
771",
Type data. Press-CODE-I-RETURN to display view Screen; Or FILE to finish.
Switching from ADDRESS BOOK to DATA

Nooa ssmaav
INPUT Screen
The DATA INPUT screen is used to input or edit the. contents of a single record.
This screen appears first when you start the Address Book mode and the Data
Address file is empty. You can enter the data of the first record immediately.
To Edit a Record
When the ADDRESS BOOK screen is displayed, you can select a record in order
to edit its contents:
1. Use 0 and 0 to move the cursor to the record that you want to edit.
2. Press RETURN ≥. The contents of the selected record is displayed on the DATA
INPUT screen and you can start editing.
To Input a New Record CODE

rt
N
V V
To input a new record, press + 0 on the ADDRESS BOOK screen (you

may also use the menu -- see "Adding a New Record" on page 70). An empty
DATA INPUT screen appears and you can start entering the data.
52

Entering and Editing a Record
1. Type or edit the data in each entry field. You may leave some items empty.
To correct, you may use (116„ (BODE; + INORD OUT ( O ), and(CODE j L LINE ow-
(C) -
To move the cursor within a field, use (cooel + texPRI ), and 1OO0E]
REIM j).
Use (cooE) + (INSERT j ( CE ) to switch the insert mode on/off.

Use (coDE) or the dead keys to superimpose characters (see "Super-
imposed Characters (Permanent Backspace)" on page 138) or to enter
accented letter (see 'Accents (Dead Keys)" on page 139). If necessary, use
Ccomi + i ( K ) to switch the keyboard (see "Switching the Keyboard" on
page 137).
2. To move the cursor vertically from one item to another, use f, R. You may
MWilf.11
also use [RERAN to move to the beginning of the next item.
3. If an entry field is too narrow or too wide, you may press (CODE, + (ircuiJ ( C )
(to increase) or (coDa + OBE!' ) (to decrease) to modify the width of the
field by steps of eight characters.
4. To go back to view the ADDRESS BOOK screen, press CANCEL or OO0E] +
!IND RN ). The new or edited record is included in the list.
If you want to edit other records, you do not need to return to the ADDRESS
BOOK screen. Simply press (tom + (NEXT ( 0 ) to display the next record,
or CODE + (PRE s) ) to display the previous one.
• You may also press (FILE ( (MENU ) to return to the MAIN MENU.
53

The ADDRESS BOOK Screen
ACDRESS KE:X MEMORY:X.XF. 9:22AM

:1. :2. :3. :4. :5.
:LAST NAME :FIRST NAME :TELEPHONE :FAX NO. :TITLE
*:Anderson :John :231-638-7520 . .
*:Bennet :William :123-432-7530 : .
*:fliggins :Joyce :429-342-6754 . .
•
Iketyp. label nant6 -r move'CiarAb±': rOss RETURN'to rtter- dat or FILE -to `finish.,
The ADDRESS BOOK screen displays the list of records. The contents of the
records cannot be edited here, but you can perform editing at a larger scale, like
copying or moving records.
N008 SS3800V
Moving the Cursor

Use CD and 0 to move the cursor horizontally across the labels. Use CD and
to move the cursor vertically across the records. To move faster and scroll the
screen, use LOOM NM' ( Q ), (CODE) + CFRES ( CD ), (pot* LRELOD ( a ),
and CcoDE) :ExPR ).
Editing the Labels

The labels are the column headings. You may make changes to the label names
if you wish.
1. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the desired label. You may now
change the label name by simply retyping.
• To correct, you may use rik (CODE ) +1woRDour ) ( ) ), and;.CODE) UNE OUT
(CD).
• Use rY*)
et + tea) or the dead keys to superimpose characters (see "Super-
imposed Characters (Permanent Backspace)" on page 138) or to enter
accented letter (see "Accents (Dead Keys)" on page 139). If necessary, use
rci:FDC at 3) (p) ) to switch the keyboard (see "Switching the Keyboard" on
page 137).
2. To move the cursor to the next label, press (TAB or use CD. To move to the
label to the left, use CD.
3. To return to the data area, press CD or ( RETURN )
54

A label can be any string of characters. However, if you want to use this file
for easy selection of a telephone number in the Communication mode, the
column which contains the telephone numbers must have a label starting with
"TELEPHONE". For example, "TELEPHONE No" is valid, but "Telephone"
or "telephone" are not. Similarly, if you want to use this file in the Fax mode,
one column must contain fax numbers, and its label must start with "FAX".
For example, "FAX No" is valid, but "Fax" or "fax" are invalid.
Preparing the Records for Merge Printing

The Create Document mode allows you to prepare master documents that contain
merge symbols associated with a label number (see "Creating the Master Docu-
ment" on page 210). When printing such a document, you will get as many copies
as you have records in the Address Book file. For the first copy, the machine will
use the first record. For the second copy, the second record will be used, and so
on. Each merge symbol in the master document will be automatically replaced with
the data under the label specified by the merge symbol. For example, if you entered
a merge symbol, and then typed "1" when creating the master document, that merge
symbol will be replaced with the contents of the first column of the Address Book
file. When creating the master document, you should remember what kind of data
you have in the different columns -- or refer to a printout of the Address Book file.
An asterisk (*) to the left of the first column indicates that a record is enabled for
merge printing. You may select only particular records for printing, if you wish. A
new record will always be automatically enabled. To disable a record, press
( (SPACE BAR) , . The asterisk disappears. Pressing the same key witl re-enable the
record.
• The asterisk can also be used to select records that you want to print in list
printing mode (see "Printing the Address Book File" on page 56).
55

Printing the Address Book File CODE
PRINT
(PRINT)
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTION EDIT DISK SAVE
This machine offers two methods for printing the data of the Address Book file:
label or list.
• Label printing allows you to print formatted data (for example, first and last
NO08 SS3EICIOV
name on the first line, company on the second line, and address on the third
line, then, city, state, zip code on the fourth line). The default format is set to
match the size of the window on an envelope, but can be modified to fit other
purposes.
• List printing is used to print a continuous list of data under selected labels.
1. Press Li;lulu' to display the function menu.
2. Use 0 and a-
to select PRINT and press IFIETURN ). The ADDRESS PRINT
MENU screen appears:
« PRINT MENU » PRINT FILE:XXXXXXXX 1:48AM
PRINT APPLICATION IABEL

PRINT RECORDS ALL
PITCH 10
LABEL SIZE 3 1/2 X 15/16
NUMBER OF LABELS ACROSS 1
Press SPACE to chanqesetting: Press RETURN.
Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "P".

Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press SoODE ▪ LPRINT ( ).
3. Use D and @j to select a parameter, and RSPACE BAR) ) to set the selected
parameter. Press (RETURN to finish or WEE:) to return to the ADDRESS
BOOK screen. The meaning of each setting is explained in the following table:
56

Address Book Print Menu
Parameter Options
PRINT APPLICATION LABEL: To print formatted labels.

LIST: To print the file.
PRINT RECORDS ALL: To print all records.
SELECTABLE: To print only enabled records.
PITCH 10, 12, or is: Selects the pitch.
LABEL SIZE 31/2 X15/16 or 4X 1 7/16
Width x Height of the printout window.
This setting is ignored when you are printing the list.
NUMBER OF LABELS ACROSS 1 or 2
This option allows you to print one or two columns of
formatted data.
This setting is ignored when you are printing the list.
If the label size is 4 x 1 7/16, the machine prints only
one label across the page.
AD
The next operation depends on your choice for the first parameter (LABEL or LIST).
If you selected LABEL...

The POSITION SET PRINT MENU screen appears:
<< POSITION SET PRINT MENU >> 9:22AM
:LAST-NAME :FIRST NAME :TELEPHONE :FAX NO. :TITLE

*:Anderson :John :231-638-7520 : .
•
*:Bennet :William :123-432-7530 : .
•
*:Higgins :Joyce :429-342-6754 : •-
I 5) ( 4)
(1.0) (1.0)
T.ise ,curborA.0:Select label'.n ansi:preSeSPACEto,te liACZSPACE to:4.1ear.. '
Press RETURN to start printing.
As you can see, some labels are displayed in reverse colors, and under those labels
appear two numbers enclosed in parentheses just above the message area. The
labels displayed in reverse color are those selected for printing. The numbers
determine their print position as follows:
• Upper number: Horizontal positioning.
• Lower number: Vertical positioning (line number).
57

If only one piece of data has to be printed on a line, the upper number indicates
the indent. For example, (4) indicates that the data will be printed four spaces
in from the left margin.
If mere than one piece of data has to be printed on the same line (more than
one label has the same lower number, the smallest top number correspond
to an indent, as explained above, and the next merely indicate the order in
which the data will be printed on the line. For example, if two labels have the
same lower number (2.0), and upper numbers (4) and (5), both will be printed
on line two. The label with upper number (4) will be printed first, from the
fourth printing position, and the label with upper number (5) will come second,
separated from the first one with a single blank.
If you did not edit the text of the labels or modify the label row by inserting blank
columns, the selected labels and their settings will be as shown below.
Default setting for LABEL printing

Label Lower number Upper number
NO08 SS31:100V
(line) (horizontal position)

FIRST NAME (1.0) (4)
LAST NAME (1.0) (5)
COMPANY (2.0) (4)
ADDRESS (3.0) (4)
CITY (4.0) (4)
STATE (4.0) (5)

ZIP (4.0) (6)
The printout of a single record will look like this:
Indent (4) One space
FIRST NAME LAST NAME

COMPANY
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP
One space
If you do not want to change any of these settings, press ggiii2E to start printing.
If you want to change the setting by selecting other labels or modify the positioning,
proceed as follows:
58

1. To select a label for printing, position the cursor over the label using E and
and press CisPoicesAFC. This message will appear:
Use cursor to set starting position. Press RETURN to set.
2. Use 0 and 0 to set the upper number, and E and l E) to set the lower number.
Initially, the numbers are (1) and (1.0).
3. Press "RETURN i to store the settings. This message will reappear:
Use cursor to select label name and press SPACE to set, BACKSPACE to clear.
Press RETURN to start printing.
4. You can repeat (1), (2), and (3) to select another label.
5. To clear a selection, move the cursor over the label and press M.
6. To start printing, press when the above message is displayed.
• The total number of lines and maximum number of characters that you can
print on a single line of a label is limited as follows:
Limit on number and length of lines on a label

Printing Window Size Number of lines Pitch Maximum length
3 1/2 X 15/16 5 10 34
12 41
15 51
4 X 1 7/16 8 10 39
12 47
15 59
If you selected UST...

The PRINT LABEL SET MENU screen appears:
« LABEL SET PRINT MENU >> 9:22AM

:X4AST NAME :FIRST NAME :TELEPHONE :FAX NO. :TITLE
*:Anderson :John :231-638-7520
*:Bennet :William :123-432-7530
*:Higgins :Joyce :429-342-6754
*e-diif-SOr- to e4iii;C 44 e iaratie

Vrintirig.
59

This screen allows you to select which data will be printed.
1 To select a column for printing, position the cursor over the label name using
E. and E and press (tsPAcEBARY). The same key is used to deselect. To
switch all labels on, press t (SPACE BAR)
• If the total length of the selected data exceeds the maximum length of a
printable line, this message will appear:
Too wide to print.
2. Press RN to start printing or t to return to the PRINT MENU

screen.
During Printing 1
CANCEL
NOM SS3EIGOV
To cancel printing, press t',CANCELz). This will work only while the printer is printing,
not while it is feeding paper.

4
The BLOCK function of the function menu allows you to copy, move or delete a block
of contiguous records or a single column.
Copying Records CODE
PRINT 4iLocx FUNCTION EDIT DISK SAVE

COPY'
is DELETE
1. To copy records, position the cursor on the first record to be copied.

2. Press uj to display the function menu.
3. UseE and a) to select BLOCK and press or to display the submenu.
4. Use If) and C) to select COPY and press The following message
appears:
Highlight line(s) to be copied and press RETURN.
60

• Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "C".
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press ccoDE)
5. Use 1 or CD to mark the records that you want to copy and press ( RETURN
This message will appear:
Move cursor to destination for blocked tent and press RETURN.
6. Move the cursor to the destination position and press RETURN J. The marked
records are inserted at the destination position.
You may press CANCEL at any time to cancel the operation and return to the
ADDRESS BOOK screen.
Deleting Records CODE
PRINT 3LOCK FUNCTION EDIT DISK SAVE

COPY
DELET£ RO
MOVE ma
1. To delete records, position the cursor on the first record to be deleted.

2. Press (MENU) to display the function menu.
3. Use CD and 0 to select BLOCK and press (RETURN or CD to display the submenu.
4. Use T and GD to select DELETE and press RETURN . The following message
appears:
Highlight line(s) to be deleted and press RETURN.
Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "D".

Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press +
5. Use CD or CD to mark the records that you want to delete and press ( RETURN )
6. Press =RETURN ;' to delete the marked records, or (DEL`) to quit.
61

• You may press CANCEL ; at any time to cancel the operation and return to the
Moving Records CODE E
PRINT BLOCK FUNTTION EDIT SAVE

COPY
DELETE
MOVE
Position the cursor on the first record to be moved.

2. Press (MENuJ to display the function menu.
3. Use C and CD to select BLOCK and press RETURN or O to display the submenu.
Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "8".
N008 SSEICIaV
4. Use Cl and T•, to select MOVE and press RETURN . The following message
appears:
Highlight line(s) to be moved and press RETURN.
Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "E".

• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press [COD€1 E
5. Use 0 or 0 to mark the records that you want to move and press (I3EruRN
Move cursor to destination for blocked text and press RETURN.
6. Move the cursor to the destination position and press RETURNI The marked
records are inserted at the destination position.
You may press t CANCEL , at any time to cancel the operation and return to the
62

Deleting one Column •
CODE
PRINT _BLOCK FUNCTION EDIT DISK SAVE

COPY
.DELETE.
MOVE
1. To delete one column, position the cursor on the label of the column to be
deleted.
2. Press (MENU to display the function menu.
3. Use O and 0 to select BLOCK and press RETURN. or 0 to display the submenu.
Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "B".
4. Use E,k; and 0 to select DELETE and press RETURN-). The following message
appears:
• Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "D".

• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press
5. Press (.RETURN to delete the column, or elms: to quit.
You may press ( CANCEL ) at any time to cancel the operation and return to the
63

Reorganizing Your File (FUNCTION)
The FUNCTION option of the menu allows you to sort your data using two different
sort keys, or to select records which satisfy specified conditions. The selected
records can then be saved on disk as a separate Address Book file. This option
also allows for inserting blank columns or records. This option is finally used to
clear the Address Book file in order to restart with a blank file or free space in the
memory.
Sorting the Data CODE

•
0
JUST
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTIQN EDIT DISK SAVE

SORT.
SELECT
INSERT
ALL DELETE
cn 1. Press LIVIENU' to display the function menu.

cn
O 2. Use 0 and 0 to select FUNCTION and press ( RETURN I or 0 to display the
a submenu.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "F".
3. Use Ci and 0 to select sou and press 'FigrutiN I . The following message
appears:
Move cursor to primary sort label and press RETURN.

• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press (CODE + U.
4. Use 0 or 0 to select the label used as the primary sort key and press RETURN
For example, if you want the data to be sorted in alphabetic order of the last
names, position the cursor on the label "LAST NAME" and press , RETURN
Move cursor to secondary sort label and press RETURN.
5. Use f or 0 to select the label used as the secondary sort key and press
fay) . For example, if you want the data for people having the same last
name to be sorted internally in alphabetic order of the first names, position
64

the cursor on the label "FIRST NAME and press ( RETURN ), If you do not want
this internal sort to take place, simply leave the cursor on "LAST NAME" and
press ( RETURN j. This message will appear:
Use cursor to select. Press RETURN.

ASCENDING DESCENDING
6. Use 0 and O to select ASCENDING (natural alphabetic order) or DESCENDING

(reverse alphabetic order) and press ( RETURN ;, The data is sorted and the
result of the operation appears on the screen.
You may press (cANcEL] at any time to cancel the operation and return to the
Accented letters and superimposed characters are sorted according to the
base character.
• The sort operation is irreversible. For example, if you have entered records
one after the other (not using the copy function described on page 60), your
records will be in chronological order, the last entered being at the bottom of
the list. If you sort the file, you will never be able to restore that initial order
automatically. In case you want to be able to restore the initial order, you must
add a new label and number the records in the order they are entered. When
you sort the data using that numbering column as primary and secondary key,
the initial order will be restored.
Selecting Records CODE L

L IND
ti

• SORT
• SELECT
INSERT
ALL DELETE
1. Press _MENU to display the function menu.

2. Use 0 and 0 to select FUNCTION and press RETURN or 0 to display the
submenu.
3. Use 0 and 1J to choose SELECT and press (RETURWi. The SELECT screen,
similar to the DATA INPUT screen appears:
65

« SELECT MENU » KB:XX 9:22A.M
LAST NAME'.
FIRST NANF
TETYPHONE
FAX NO.
T/TTY
COMPANY'
ADDRESS
CITY
$TAT£
7TP
'Tyiee'select'condition Pree TAB to` start select:
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "L".

• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press (cow + O.
The SELECT screen allows you to input the selection conditions. You may enter
more than one condition. For example, if you want to select the records of people
living in Atlanta and working for a company called "XYZ INC.", type "Atlanta" in the
entry field CITY, and "XYZ INC." in the entry field COMPANY. People working for
XYZ INC, but living in Portland will not be selected. People living in Atlanta, but
Nom ss3uaav
working for a different company will not be selected.

• For this function to work correctly, you should be careful to use consistent
formats when you enter your records and the selection conditions. Be careful
about the capitalization. For this machine, "Atlanta", 'ATLANTA', and "atlanta"
are different strings.
5. Enter your conditions. Proceed as when entering data on the DATA INPUT
screen. For details, see "Entering and Editing a Record" on page 53.
6. Press 'TAB, to start the operation. After a while, the ADDRESS BOOK screen
displays the selected data.
• If the machine could not find records satisfying your conditions, this message
will appear:
Record(s) not found.
Once the selected data is displayed, you have several options:

• You may press f ivacEL) to display the original data again.
• You may print the selected data. For details, see "Printing the Selected Data"
on page 67.
• You may save the selected data on disk. For details, see "Saving the Selected
Data on Disk" on page 67.
66

Printing the Selected Data CODE P
PRINT SAVE
With the selected data displayed, press (mENuJ to display the function menu.
Only two functions are available: PRINT and SAVE.
2. Use F and l to select PRINT and press ( RETURN
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "P".
• Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press (CODE PFUNT t1
5 1 ).
Saving the Selected Data on Disk •

CODE
CALC
PRINT SAVE.
1. Insert a disk in the drive.

2. With the selected data displayed, press [MENU) to display the function menu.
Only two functions are available: PRINT and SAVE.
3. Use CJ and ri to select SAVE and press RETURN The machine will not ask
you to enter a file name. The selected data will automatically be saved on the
disk under the file name "SELECT.MRG"
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "S".
• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press (CODE) 4- O.
You can have only one "SELECT.MRG" file on the same disk. If you have
already saved selected data on the disk, this message will appear:
Overwrite. Press RETURN to overwrite
Press Owl-um to overwrite, or (CANCEL if you do not want the old selected
data to be replaced on the disk. You can change the disk and repeat steps
(1) to (3) to save on another disk.
67

Inserting a Blank Column or Record
CODE
INSERT
PRINT ELOCF FUNCTION 1-22.: - S1 SAVE

SORT
SELECT
INSERT
ALL DEL7=TE
. To insert a blank column, position the cursor on the label where you want
to insert a blank column.
To insert a blank record, position the cursor on the record where you want
to insert a blank record.
2. Press LMENU to display the function menu.
3. Use D and cr!) to select FUNCTION and press E RETURN or D to display the
N008 smaav
submenu.
4. Use O and 0 to select INSERT and press RETURN . The insertion takes place
immediately.
• Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "I".
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press CODE + INSERT)
When you insert a blank column, the column which was initially selected and all
columns to the right are pushed to the right. A blank column of 15 characters and
an empty label appear. The cursor rests on the blank label so that you can
immediately input a new label.
When you insert a blank record, the record which was initially selected and all
records below are pushed down. The cursor rests on the blank record so that you
can immediately press (RETURN ) and enter the data on the DATA INPUT screen.
Deleting the File
RI NT BLOCK FUNCTION EDIT DI SK SAVE

SORT
SELECT
INSERT
ALL DELETE
1. Press MENU, to display the function menu.

2. Use 0 and C) to select FUNCTION and press RETURN , or CD to display the
submenu.
68

3. Use CD and CD to select ALL DELETE and press RETURN . This message will
appear:
Delete all? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "A".

4. Press Lamm to clear the file, or CANCEL, to quit.
69

Editing Tools (EDIT)
The following functions will help you when editing your file.
Adding a New Record ti CODE
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTION EDIT ri", SF SAVE

NEW RECORD
NEW LABEL
'FOPRECORD
BOTTOM RECORD
LABEL LONGER
LABEL SHORTER
Press (multi to display the function menu.

NOOEI SS3800V
2. Use K, and 0 to select EDIT and press RETURN ) or Ei3 to display the submenu.
Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "E".
3. UseO and 0 to select NEW RECORD and press (RETURN J. The machine
displays the DATA INPUT screen and you can start entering data for the new
record. The new record will be at the bottom of the list when you return to
view the ADDRESS BOOK screen.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "N".
Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2) you may type press Loom] + CD
Adding a New Label
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTION %On D I SK SAVE

NEW RECORD
:NEW
TOP RECORD
.BOTTOM RECORD
LABEL LONGER
LABEL SHORTER
1. Move the cursor to the label row.

2. Press (MENU) to display the function menu.
3. Use @ and g) to select EDIT and press or Ci) to display the submenu.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "E".
4. Use ga and C) to select NEW LABEL and press . The machine adds a
blank column to the right of the last one. The cursor rests on the blank label
so that you can start entering the new label.
70

• Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "W".
Jumping to the Top or Bottom Record

NEW RECORO-
. NEW LABEL
TOP RECORD
BOTTOM NECORD
LABEL LONGER
LABEL SHORTER

NEW RECORD
NEW LABEL
TOP RECORD
SOTTOWRECORDH-
LABEL LONGER
LABEL SHORTER
•
1. If the cursor is on the label area, move it to the record area.
2. Press `MENU) to display the function menu.
3. Use l i and to select EDIT and press neTuRN ,‘ or CD to display the submenu.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "E". dB
4. Use 04 and to select TOP RECORD or BOTTOM RECORD and press (RETURN ].
The cursor jumps to the top or the bottom of the list.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "T" for top, or "B" for bottom.
71

Changing the Width of a Column T CLR
CODE
T SET
CODE

NEW RECORD
NEW LABEL
TOP RECORD
BOTTOM RECORDS
LABEL ,LONGER
LABEL SHORTER
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTION -EDIT DISK SAVE

NEW RECORD
)IOO9 SSRIOCIV
NEW LABEL
11::)P RECORD
BOTTOM RECORD
LABEL LONGER
LABEL SHORTER
As we have seen on page 53, column widths can also be changed on the DATA
INPUT screen. To make a column larger or shorter, on the ADDRESS BOOK
screen, proceed as follows:
1 Move the cursor to the label of the column that you want to modify.
2. Press MENUto display the function menu.
3. Use 0 and 0 to select EDIT and press ( RETURN or CD to display the submenu.
Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "E".
4. Use CD and 0 to select LABEL LONGER to increase the width, LABEL SHORTER
to decrease the width and press ( RETURN ). The width of the selected column
is increased or decreased by eight characters.
Accelerator: Instead of (4) you may type "L" to increase, or "S" to decrease.
Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press (cot* + (0 )
to increase, or (ooDE) 1TSET; ( 0 ) to decrease.
The width of a single column must by in the range of between seven and 71
characters. The machine does not allow you to make a column narrower that
the largest data already entered in that column.
The maximum width of a record is 165 characters.
72

Loading a File from a Disk CODE
L IND
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTION EDIT um", SAVE
Before loading a file, remember that the memory can store only one Address Book
file. If you load a file from a disk before saving the current file on a disk, the current
file will be erased. See "Saving the Address Book File on Disk" on page 74.
1. Press :MENU) to display the function menu.
2. Use ( ) and CD to select DISK and press to display the DISK INDEX
screen.
« DISK INDEX >> REMAIN:XXX.XK *tura 9:22AM
2O.,1L TRXT2 (XX_X) TEXTS (XX.X)

ADDRESS1.MRG (XX.X) ADDRESS2.MRG (XX.X) SCHEDULE.DTB (XX.X)
04,
Se4,ptt..—Cfil4CAO(VPtit$CMENW- 04k:PAKETs go pumsmosam_ ,
• Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "K".

3. Use the cursor key to select an Address Book file (extension ".MRG") and
press MENU to display the function menu of the DISK INDEX screen.
COPY DELETE RENAME DISK COPY DISK DELETE ;PAP
4. Use E and 0 to select LOAD and press (IIETURN). This message will appear:
Erase current file and load file from disk? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).

• Short cut: instead of (3) and (4), you may press + (D.
5. If you have not saved the current file, this is your last chance. Press CANCaj
to return to the DISK INDEX screen.
If you have already saved the current file, press CRETuRN to load the file
selected on the DISK INDEX screen.
73

6. When the file is loaded, press rtmc4-2) to switch from the DISK INDEX screen
to the ADDRESS BOOK screen and display the content of the file.
Saving the Address Book File on Disk CODE
CALC
PRINT BLOCK FUNCTION EDIT DISK JAW
1. Press (44014.; to display the function menu.

2. Use E and l to select SAVE and press IIETURN- . This message will appear:
NOOEI SS3800V
FILENAME:
Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may type "S".

Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press +
3. Type a file name and press ( RETURN). The extension ".MRG" will be auto-
matically to the file name. Press to cancel the save operation and
return to the ADDRESS BOOK screen.
4. . Press LON* + (AM ( ) to return to the MAIN MENU screen.
74

Spreadsheet
What is a Spreadsheet?
In the past, financial records for any type of business or other organization were
always kept by hand in bound form, hence the term "keeping the books". A sales
ledger, for instance, might be laid out as a graph, with the months of the year across
the top, and the names of sales personnel or merchandise down the left column.
This type of accounting tool had another name; it was called a "Spreadsheet".
JAN. FEB. APR. MAY JUN. JUL. AUG. SEP. OCT. NOV. DEC. TOTAL
This is an efficient system, though, even with an electronic calculator, bookkeeping

is still a difficult task, especially when revisions or corrections are to be made. This
is the major advantage of the electronic spreadsheet; the ability to make changes
and corrections at any time, and have all the calculations made for you, quickly and
easily.
How to Start?
1. To start working in spreadsheet mode, switch the machine on to display the
MAIN MENU.
<< MAIN MENU »

ADDRESS500E 7. CLOCK
SPREADSHEET 8. COMMUNICATION
4. CREATE DOCUMENT , 9. FAX
mobire tursoe,and press RETURN,:::Ptess MENU for Moxe selections
2. Insert a data disk in the drive.
75

3. Move the cursor to 3. SPREADSHEET using E, E, E, and 1• ;, then press
r RETURN ). This message will appear:
All memory files must be saved on disk or deleted before using SPREADSHEET.
Press CODE+S to save files, CODE+D tc- delete files.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "3".

4. Since the Spreadsheet program makes use of all the memory, you must
transfer all your files to the disk or delete them before the program is loaded.
Press (CODE) + Ei to save the files, or icoDE + 0 to delete them. You may
also press to return to the MAIN MENU.
To delete the files...

• If you do not want to save your files (because you have already saved them,
for example), simply press + 0. This message will appear:
Delete? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCELlno).
if you press {_RETURN), all the files are deleted. This includes the Create
Document, Address Book, and Scheduler/Calendar files, as well as the
User Dictionary and Abbreviated Phrase files.
If you press CANCEL, the machine returns to the normal MAIN MENU, and
133HSaV38dS
you can select another mode.
To save the files...

Press [cot* + [U. The MEMORY INDEX displays Create Document, Address
Book, and Scheduler/Calendar files currently in the memory. The first file that
is going to be saved is displayed in reverse color and a message asks you to
wait:
Saving the file....please wait.
After a file has been saved, the machine automatically starts saving the next
file. When all files displayed on the MEMORY INDEX have been saved, the
machine starts saving files that are not displayed on the MEMORY INDEX,
such as the USER DICTIONARY, etc. A message like this asks you to wait:
Saving user dictionary....please wait.
76

• If a file with the same file name already exists on the disk, this message
appears:
Overwrite. Press RETURN to overwrite.
• If you press r RETURN] the file is saved, overwriting the old file on the disk. If
you press CANCEL, , you are requested to enter a new file name:
Type filename and press RETURN.

FILENAME:
If you type a file name and press (RETURN 1, the file is saved under that file
name. If you press (CANCEL, this message will appear:
Press RETURN to delete current file, CANCEL to exit.
• If you press (-RETURN , the file will not be saved. If you press ( CAWS. , the
machine returns to the MAIN MENU.
After the files are saved or deleted...

After your files have been saved or deleted, the SPREADSHEET INPUT/EDIT
screen appears:
PITCH:10
2
3
Tinter your spreadsheet data. Press FILE to finish.
If You Want to Retrieve an Old Spreadsheet

for further Editing
If, instead of creating a new spreadsheet, you wish to work on a spreadsheet that
you have already created, you must first call the SPREADSHEET INDEX screen
and retrieve the file from that screen. For details, see:
• "Retrieving a Spreadsheet File" on page 119.
77

The Spreadsheet Templates
The Spreadsheet Templates are pre-formatted files to be used with the Spreadsheet
Software. They are stored on the disk which comes with your machine. A list of
these files will be displayed on the INDEX screen of the Spreadsheet Software.
These files allow for easy creation of most standard spreadsheets. Since the format
is already decided, all you have to do is input your data in that format without going
to the trouble of first thinking about the most convenient layout. You may retrieve
one of these files, input your data in the pre-programmed format, and store the file
under a new file name. The Spreadsheet Templates are write-protected, which
means that they cannot be erased and that they will always be on the disk in their
original form.
How to Finish?
When you have finished, or when you need a break, insert a disk in the drive and
save your file. For details about saving files, see:
• "Saving Your Spreadsheet Work" on page 118.
Help Menus • CODE H

HELP
Several functions of the spreadsheet can be activated by pressing (CODE + a letter

key. The key tops do not indicate the function of those keys. Before you remember
133HSaV3EldS
all these special keys, the help menus will provide you with an easy way to activate
the functions. A help menu displays the list of functions that are available at the
moment you call it. Three different help menus can be displayed: one in the
command mode of the INPUT/EDIT screen, one in the input mode of the same
screen, and one on the SPREADSHEET INDEX screen.
1. To display a help menu, press (CODE) + (HELP ). The list of functions
available at that moment -- and the list of the corresponding keys -- will appear
on the screen.
2. Press + the indicated letter key to activate the desired function. The
help menu will disappear and the function will be activated.
• Press (CANCEL , or press cot* + (HELP) ( ) again to cancel the help menu
without activating a function.
78

Command Mode of the INPUT/EDIT Screen
CTR : CODE+F COPY : CODE+C PITCH : CODE+1

RMF : CODE+R DELETE : CODE+D PRINT : CODE+P
BOLD : CODE+B MOVE : CODE+E INSERT : CODE+I
UNDER : CODE+N LOCK : COD£+L GOTO : CODE+G
EDIT : TAB PAGE BREAK:CODE+A
Input/Edit Mode of the INPUT/EDIT Screen
CTR : CODE+F
RMF : CODE-'-R
LOCK : CODE+L
PAGE BREAK
: CODE+A
SPREADSHEET INDEX Screen
COPY : CODE+C CONV CODE+0

DELETE : CODE+D PRINT : CODE+P
RENAME : CODE+R
79

The input/Edit Mode
The SPREADSHEET INPUT/EDIT Screen
PITCH:10
F G
2
3
4
17 Enter: your spreadsheet data. Press FILE to finish.
The INPUT/EDIT screen is your electronic spreadsheet. This screen is used to

input and edit the data of your spreadsheet. It is divided into cells, designated by
their positions on the grid, so that the cell at the top left of the sheet becomes A1,
the cell diagonally to the right and below it B2, etc.
Moving Around the Screen 4- t 4, -+

EXPP PRE S NEXT S RELOC
When you call up the INPUT/EDIT screen, the cursor will be in cell A1, ready for
133HSCIV38dS
input. The cursor can be moved with CD, and O to highlight any cell and to
tell the machine where you wish to input. You will notice that only a portion of the
spreadsheet is shown on the screen. The spreadsheet extends far beyond what
the screen is able to display at one time -- you may input data into as much as 20
columns (A through T), and 65 rows (1 through 65).
It is also possible to move the cursor faster: (cone) + a cursor key moves the cursor
to a border of the screen.
To move the cursor to a border of the spreadsheet, press (coDE + GO TO (El ).
Use arrow keys to move to top, bottom, left or right.
Press a cursor key to move in the desired direction.
80

Moving the cursor
Keys Function
Moves the cursor to the next cell in the direction of
the keytop arrow.
CODE i + ;F. Moves the cursor to the screen edge in the direction
CODE + of the keytop arrow.
CODE +E#
[CODE '+ E_i;;
(CODE; + LGO TO j ), then...
W, or Moves the cursor to the spreadsheet edge in the

direction of the keytop arrow.
The Input Area

With this electronic spreadsheet, you always type or edit the data of each cell on
the top line of the screen, which is called the "input area".
There are basically two ways to input data: direct input, and formula input. Direct
input means that you directly type what will appear in the highlighted cell. Formula
input means that you type a formula in the input area. In that case, the result of
the formula is displayed in the cell.
When you move the cursor across the grid to highlight (select) a particular cell, the
contents of that cell are always displayed in the input area on the top line of the
screen, the way you typed them. What you see in the input area, may often differ
from what is displayed in the cell:
• If you typed a formula, the formula -- not the result -- will appear in the input
area. This feature allows for easy editing when a formula is wrong.
• Even in the case of direct input, the data may look slightly different in the input
area and in the cell. This is because this machine allows you to control the
layout of the data in the cells. For example, you may decide that a cell will be
displayed in bold. The data will appear in bold in the cell, and in normal face
in the input area.
PITCH:10
1
2
3
81

Entering and Editing Data
• IMPORTANT WARNING: There is a possibility that you may run out of memory
before filling the entire spreadsheet with data, depending on the types of data
you enter. The system will warn you of this with the message "Memory full."
At this point, you may no longer enter data, but only delete it. We recommend
that you save your file and continue with a new spreadsheet file. Each
spreadsheet file may contain about 15K of memory.
To enter data in an empty cell, select that cell and type the data. A small cursor --
the input cursor -- will appear in the input area. Press RETURN when you have
finished. The data will appear in the cell.
Proceed exactly in the same way to replace old data with new data. The old data
will disappear from the input area as soon as you start typing. The new data will
appear in the cell when you press ( RETURN i after retyping.
Ifyoumistakenlyhita characterkey whilemoving through the grid, the machine
will switch to the input/edit mode. If you press RETURN at this step, the old
data will be replaced with the character. To avoid this, press ( CANCEC instead
of ( RETURN 3. This will restore the original data and return the machine to the
command mode.
To edit old data without deleting it first, press `TAB,. The cursor appears in the input
area and you may now edit the data. Press ( RETURN ) when the data is edited.
After typing or editing in the input area, you may press E*3, Ft, or O instead
of (RETURN j , These keys enter the data, return to the command mode, and
133HSCIVRIdS
move the cursor one position in the direction of the arrow mark on the grid.
in input/edit mode, you may use F: and Ci) to move the cursor across the data
in the input area. However, O will enter the data, as explained above, if you
try to move past the last character. You may also use ,CODE EXPR l ( -) )
to move to the first character, or bc_ocEi + 1-13ET:cid ( ) to move to the right of
the last one.
82

input/edit keys
To type Function
and correct data
Character keys To type the data.
(is
-) To delete the character to the left of the cursor.
(woe) + WORD OUT ) M$( ) To delete the word to the left of the cursor.
CODE (LINEOur ) To delete all characters from the input area.
CODE tNSERt 3 To toggle the insert/overwrite modes.
O To move one position to the left.
To move one character to the right. If the cursor is
to the right of the last character, this key enters the
data and selects the next cell to the right.
Moves the cursor to the first character.
(copE) Moves the cursor to the right of the last character.
Keys used to enter data

To enter data and Function
return to command mode
LAMM To enter the data.
CD To enter the data and select the next cell to the right
(only when the cursor is past the last character of the
input area.)
a] and EC Enters the data and selects the next cell above or
below.
1 e
ICANCEL Restores the old data.
Alphanumeric Data
Alphanumeric data is any combination of characters (letters, digits, and other
characters) used as a label to identify the entries of the spreadsheet. It is usually
as a column heading, such as "JAN." or "12th Region". This data is not to be
calculated.
Format Marks
If the label data begins with an alphabetic letter, it is assumed that this data is not
to be calculated. In this case, the data is placed flush left in the cell unless a flush
right or centering format mark is used.
If the label begins with any of the following:
83

+-(@1234567890.
it is assumed that this data is to be calculated. In this case, a format mark must
be used in order to identify this data as a label and not as a number to be used in
a calculation.
Format marks
Format Mark Position of the Data
Flush left
Flush right Opt*3 + -- see Help Menu)
A Centering ((cooE, -- see Help Menu)
Format marks are displayed in the input area only. They never appear in the cell.
The above characters are considered as format marks only when they are entered
in the first position of the input area. If they are entered in the middle of the data,
they are considered as common characters and will appear in the cell.
To enter a format mark for right justification, type a double quotation mark (") or
press (coDEJ
To enter a format mark for centering, press coDE1+ (-01,
• IMPORTANT: To make sure that alphanumeric data such as a date (e.g.
10-12-1989) or a phone number (e.g. 231-638-7520) is not calculated, always
use a format mark. If you enter 231-638-7520 without a format mark, you will
133HSCIV38dS
get the result of the calculation (231-638-7520 = -7927).
Maximum Length of Alphanumeric Data

The maximum length of alphanumeric data is 55 characters (the total length of the
input area). If the data cannot fit in the cell, it will use the next cells of the grid
unless these cells are already occupied. This convenient feature is used for long
titles, when you do not want to disturb the layout of the spreadsheet by increasing
the width of a column. It should be noted that entering many long alphanumeric
data may cause the memory to become full before all cells are occupied. Also,
adjusting the width of many columns to display long alphanumeric data may cause
truncation of the rows in the printout.
Numeric Data
Numeric data are direct numbers or formulas and are to be calculated. When data
is not recognized as alphanumeric, the machine will interpret it as numeric data.
In that case, the machine will check whether or not the data is valid.
84

• If the data is valid, the result (a number) is calculated. If the number can fit
in the cell, it is automatically right-justified. If the number cannot fit in the cell,
a string of asterisks (*) will fill the cell. The correct number is however kept
in the memory, and will be displayed if you adjust the width of the column.
• If the data is not valid, ERROR will be displayed in the cell, and a message
such as one of the following messages will inform you as to what is going
wrong.
Example 1: if a denominator is zero.
Division by zero.
Example 2: If a result is positive and contains more than 13 digits.
Numeric overflow.
Example 3: if a result is negative and contains more than 13 digits.
Numeric underflow.
Example 4: If a number contains characters other than numerics and decimal

point (e.g. 1,000, 100$, 1A2).
Invalid entry.
Direct Numbers
A direct number is digits, and possibly a decimal point. Other characters will make
the data invalid. The maximum number of digits is 13 (zeroes preceding other digits
are not counted). Here are some examples of valid and invalid direct numbers:
85

Valid Invalid
1234 1,000 (comma is invalid)
0.94956 125$ ($ is invalid)
00001 12a12 (a is invalid)
000000000000001 99999999999999
(zeroes are discarded) (more than 13 digits)
Formulas
A formula is made of operators, operands, and possibly pairs of parentheses to
change the order of calculation.
Operators
The operators that are recognized by the machine are, in order of precedence:
Operators
+- Positive and negative sign
Exponentiation
* / Multiplication, division
+- Addition, subtraction
133HSaValdS
• The + and - operators are considered as the sign of the following operand
when they come first in a formula, immediately after a left parenthesis or
another operator.
• The # operatorperforms only integer exponentiation. If the exponent (the next
operand after #) has a decimal value, it will be rounded to the closest integer
before exponentiation is performed. Therefore, this operator cannot be used
to calculate roots (although roots can always be written as a decimal exponent
in math). Zero with any positive exponent gives zero. Zero with a negative
exponent gives "invalid entry."
• Division by zero is invalid.
• A sequence of three or more operators makes a formula invalid (244-1 is
invalid).
• A sequence of two operators is valid only if the second operator is a sign ÷ or
- (5*-2 is valid and gives -10 while 142 is invalid).
Operands
An operand can be a valid number, the address of a cell containing numeric data,
a function, or a valid formula included in a pair of parentheses.
86

Examples of valid operands:
123 (direct number)

Al or al (cell address; Al must contain numeric data)
@SUM(Al..B6) (valid function)
(Al +5*@SUM(B1..B12)) (valid formula included in a pair of parentheses)
• A cell address can be written using either small or capital letters.

• When a cell address has to come first in a formula, it must be preceded
with a + or - sign, or by a left parenthesis. Otherwise, the formula will
be considered alphanumeric data and will not be calculated. Therefore,
instead of A1+A2, enter +A1+A2, (Al+A2), or (A1)+A2.
• If a cell referred to contains alphanumeric data, the formula is invalid, and
ERROR will be displayed. An empty cell, however, is valid and assumed to
contain zero.
Using Simple Formulas

In order to familiarize yourself with the formulas, we suggest that you try the following
examples.
1. Enter 1+2 in cell Al . (Position the cursor on Al , type 1+2, and press (-RETURN ;.)
1+2 PITCH:10
3
2
The calculation is made automatically, and the result displayed in Al. The formula
as you typed it, however, will remain, and appear in the input area whenever the
cursor is placed on cell Al .
As you already know, inputs such as this do not always have to be numbers. They
may also be formulas that direct the system to calculate the result of an operation
on numbers already input into the spreadsheet, using cell addresses rather than
direct numbers. This function allows you to create a mathematical relationship
between desired cells that remains unchanged, regardless of the content of those
cells.
2. Enter 10 in cell A2, then enter 2 in cell B2.
87

82 : P:TCH:li:
G
1 3
2 10 2
3. Enter +A2+B2 in cell C2 (the + sign is used here because a formula cannot
begin with a letter).
C2 1 -0-A2+B2 PIT:H:1.
1V
2 10 12
4. Enter +A2-B2 in cell D2.
+A2-B2 P=TCH:10
2 10 2 12
5. Enter +A2*B2 in cell E2.

133HSCIV38dS
+A2*B2 PITCH:10
G
3
2 10 2 12 20
6. Enter +A2/82 in cell F2.
+A2/B2 PITCH:10
A•
3
2 10 2 12 8 20.
7. Enter +A2#B2 in cell G2.
+A2#B2 PITCH:a0
3
10 2 12 8 20 100
88

8. Now try changing the value in A2 to 20.
A2 : 2C PITCH:1C
1
2 20 12 F 2C 5 100
Nothing changes because you have not yet asked the machine to carry out
recalculation.
9. To recalculate the results, refer to "Recalculation" on page 110. All the results
which depend on the value of A2 are now updated.
20 PITCH:10
2 24 2 22 18 40 10 400
Order of calculation of a formula

Calculation of a formula is performed in the order of precedence of the operators:
the + or - sign is first attributed to the operand directly to the sign's right, next
exponentiations are carried out, then multiplication and divisions, and finally,
additions and subtractions.
Example:
2#3*4-2
8*4-2
32-2
30
When two or more operators have the same order of precedence (multiplication
and divisions, or addition and subtraction), calculation is carried out from left to
right.
Examples:
1+3+4-2 2#3#2
4+4-2 8#2
8-2 64
6
89

To modify the order of calculation, you may use pairs of parentheses. The formula
in parentheses is calculated first.
Examples:
1+34,4 (1+3)1,4
1+12 4*4
13 16
Parentheses can be nested. Calculation proceeds from the innermost pair of

parentheses.
Example:
((3*4+1)*4÷3)*4-12
(13*4+3)*4-12
55*4-12
220-12
208
• Up to 6 pairs ofparentheses can be nested. Using more than 6 pairs ofnested

parentheses makes the formula invalid. The formula will also be invalid if
parentheses do not come by pairs.
Maximum Length of a Formula

133HSanddS
The maximum length of a formula is 55 characters (the total length of the input
area). If a formula is longer, try to simplify it by using functions (see below). It
should be noted that entering many long formulas may cause the memory to become
full before all the cells are occupied.)
Math Functions
Functions are made by the @ character, followed with a valid function name in
capital or small letters (see list below), and a pair of parentheses containing the
argument(s) of the function.
Arguments are the numeric data that the function will process to return a result.
Valid arguments are numbers and/or cell addresses separated with commas, or a
range defined by the addresses of two opposite corners, separated with two periods
(..).
Example:
90

@SUM(1,A1,4,B6) returns the sum 1+Al +4+B6
@SUM(A1..B4) returns the sum Al +B1+A2+B2+A3+B3+A4+B4
• Some functions like @INT accept only one argument. In that case, using more
than one argument or using a range makes the formula invalid.
• A range cannot be used simultaneously with numbers or addresses.
Example:
OSUM(1,A1..B4) and @SUM(A23,A1..B6) are invalid.
• Although a function is a valid operand of a formula, a formula is not a valid

argument of a function.
Example:
1+Al +@SUM(B2..C5) is a valid formula
@SUM(1+2), ©SUM(+Al ), and @SUM(1+Al ) are all invalid
What is a Range of Cells?

A range is no more than a group of cells enclosed in a rectangle, and therefore,
can be specified by the addresses of two opposite corners. When using math
functions, you specify a range using the notation Al ..C3, for example. You could
also specify the same range with A3..C1, Cl..A3, or C3..A1.
PITCH:10
r •
Range Al..C3, This is not
2 A3..C1, Cl..A3, a range
3 or C3..A1
Easy Input of a Range

Rather than typing in the cell address at each corner of the range, you are able to
mark and highlight the range to be used. The spreadsheet will automatically define
the top left and bottom right corners of the range.
Suppose you want to calculate the sum of the range Al ..E2 and display the result
in G1.
91

II7.7H:10
1‘• 'P "....
7.1
.).
3 4 5
6 8 9 10
1. Move the cursor to GI and type @SUM(. As soon as you type the left
parenthesis of the function, the following message appears:
Enter cell specification.
2. Instead of typing Al, move the cursor to Al and press (CODE] +J (see Help
Menu). @a SUM(Al.. is now displayed in the input area.
SUM(Al..O PITCH:10
3 4
. 6 7 8 9 10
3. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range E2.
@SUM(Al..0 PITCH:10
1 3 4 5
1.33HSanddS
6 7 8
4. Press Krif.X11. The cursor is back on G1 and the result is calculated.
SUM(Al..E2)O PITCH:10
1 5
6 7 a 10
5. Press again. The result, 55, appears cell Gl.
@SUM(Al..E2) PITCH:10
1 2 3 4 5 5
6 7 8 9 10
92

List of Functions
Some functions can process only one argument, and are very similar to the math
functions which are learned at school. Arguments may include not only direct
number inputs, but cell addresses as well.
The most sophisticated function of the spreadsheet can process multiple argu-
ments. Arguments may be written individually, separating each with a comma, or,
if all the arguments belong to a range, the range can be specified by the addresses
of two opposite corners, using two periods as a separator. Arguments may be
defined as a range or may consists of any combination of direct numbers and cell
addresses.
• Functions Using a Single Argument
Functions using a single argument

Name Definition
@Aes Gives the absolute value of the argument. If the argument is positive, or
zero, the same value is returned; if the argument is negative, the opposite
of the argument is returned.
@ABS(5) gives 5
@ABS(-5) gives 5
@1NT Gives the integer part of the argument. The decimal point and subsequent
decimal digits are removed without being rounded off; an integer will remain
untouched.
@INT(5) gives 5
OINT(0.9) gives 0
@INT(1.1) gives 1
SQUARE Gives the square of the argument. The argument multiplied by itself is
returned; the result is always a positive number.
@SQUARE(5) gives 25
@SQUARE(-5) gives 25
@SQUARE(0) gives 0
psoiTr Gives the square root of the argument. The result multiplied by itself is
equal to the argument. The argument may not be negative.
@SQRT(25) gives 5
@SQRT(2) gives 1.41421
@SQRT(-25) is invalid
93

@ROUND Rounds off the argument to the number of specified decimal places. Two
data entries are required between the parentheses: the argument itself, and
a direct number that specifies the number of decimal places. If that number
is not an integer, it is first rounded off to the closest integer.
@ROUND(1.66666,2) gives 1.67

@ROUND(1.66666,3) gives 1.667
@ROUND(1.66666,2.1) gives 1.67
@ROUND(1.66666,2.5) gives 1.667
• Functions Using Multiple Arguments
Functions using multiple arguments

Name Definition
@AVG Gives the average value of the arguments. The sum of the arguments is
calculated, then that sum is divided by the total number of arguments.
@AVG(1,2,3,4) gives (1+2+3+4)/4 = 2.5

@AVG(175) gives 175/1 = 175
@couNT Gives the number of non-blank cells. This function is an exception to the
general rules in that: 1) the arguments MUST be cell addresses, and 2) the
cell referred to may contain alphanumeric or numeric data.
@COUNT(Al ,A2,A3,A4) gives 3 if Al contains 5 (numeric), A2 contains your

name (alphanumeric), A3 contains ERROR (this is not a blank cell), and A4
is empty.
133HSCIVRIdS
@IF This special function checks whether or not a specified condition is verified,
and displays a value that depends on the result of that check. The general
form of this function is @IF(condition, argumentl,argument2), and can be
read in plain English as: if the "condition" is satisfied, then display "argumentl ".
If the condition is not satisfied, then display "argument2". The "condition" is
usually an arithmetic comparison, using two values (number or cell address)
and one of the following comparison operators:
= equal to <= less than or equal to
< less than >= greater than or equal to
> greater than <> not equal to
@IF(A1>100,100,50) gives 100 if Al is greater than 100, and 50 if Al is equal
to 100 or smaller than 100
>100,100,A1) gives 100 if A1=200 and 60 if A1=60
"Argument2" can be omitted. In that case, the function returns "argument1"
when the condition is satisfied, and zero when the condition is not satisfied.
@IF(A1=50,100) is equivalent to @IF(A1=50,100,0)
If "argument? and "argument2" are both omitted, the function returns 1 when
the condition is satisfied, and zero when the condition is not satisfied.
@IF(A1=50) is equivalent to @IF(A1=50,1,0)

100*@IF(A1=50) is equivalent to @IF(A1=50,100)
94

The "condition" can be a cell address. In that case, "arguments" and "argu-
ment2" must be omitted. The function returns 1 if the cell contains a numeric
data, and zero if the cell contains alphanumeric data.
@IF(A1) gives 1 if Al =50 and gives 0 if Al contains a label.

@MAX Gives the greatest argument (maximum). Remember that a positive argument
is always greater than a negative one.
@MAX(1,234) gives 234

@MAX(1,-99999) gives 1
@mIN Gives the smallest argument (minimum). Rememberthat a negative argument

is always smaller than a positive one.
@MIN(1,234) gives 1
@MIN(-1,99999) gives -1
@sum Gives the sum of the arguments. This function is very useful in shortening
long sums when the arguments belong to a range.
@SUM(1,2,3,4,5) gives 15
@SUM(Al ,A2,A3,61,B2,B3) is equivalent to @SUM(Al..B3)
@TSUM Gives the total sum of a range of cells, and also the sum of each row and
column of the range if they contain data. This function is an exception to the
general rules in that: 1) the argument MUST be a range, and 2) results are
displayed not only in the selected cell (total sum), but also in the column to
the right and in the row below the range. You must therefore be sure that the
column to the right and the row below the range is empty. See below for an
example.
1. Enter the numbers shown below in the range Al ..C3, then enter
@TSUM(A1..C3) in D4.
D4 @TSUM(Al..03)O PITCH:10
A
1 2 3
4 5 6
3 7 8 9
2. Press FERMI`). The results appear as follows:
@TSUM(Al..C3) PITCH:10
1 2 3 6
2 4 5 6 15
3 7 6 9 24
12 15 1B 45
95

The Command Mode
The command mode permits formatting and modification of an entire range of cells
and is used to improve the layout of your spreadsheet.
Bold CODE
1. Move the cursor to a corner of the range that you want to bold.
2. Press LcoDE + ED (see Help Menu). The following menu appears:
HEW: BOLA. ON.. BOLD OFF
3. Use CD and CD to select BOLD ON and press (!RETURN ). The following message
appears:
Mark range to be bolded. Press RETURN when done.
4. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press RETURN ). The
cells of the range which already contain data appear in bold-face characters.
Empty cells are unchanged, but if you input data in one of them, the data will
133HSaV3EldS
be bolded.
• To unbold a range of cells, proceedin the same way as above, but select BOLD
OFF in step (3).
Underline CODE
1. Move the cursor to a corner of the range that you want to underline.
2. Press + 0 (see Help Menu). The following menu appears:
gRI4F;;ON: UNDERLINE OFF
3. Use ti3 and OD to select UNDERLINE ON and press Rau . The following
message appears:
Mark range to be underlined. Press RETURN when done.
96

4. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press RETURN J. The
cells of the range (even empty cells) are underlined.
To remove underlining from a range of cells, proceed in the same way as
above, but select UNDERLINE OFF in step (3).
Absolute and Relative Addresses

Whenever the layout of your spreadsheet is altered, and the data within a cell has
been copied, the cell reference in the formulas are updated accordingly.
However, there may be times that you do not wish the cell address in the formula
updated.
If a cell has a relative address, it is always updated to reflect any layout change.
If a cell has an absolute address, it is never updated to reflect any layout change.
All cell addresses are considered relative, unless a $ (dollar sign) is placed at the
beginning of the cell address in the formula. The dollar sign designates the cell
address as being absolute.
Copying a Range of Cells CODE
1. Position the cursor on a corner of the range that you want to copy.
2. Press + re) (see Help Menu). This message will appear:
Mark range to be copied. Press RETURN when done.
3. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press RETURN . This
message will appear:
Move block cursor to destination and press RETURN.
4. Move the cursor to the upper-left corner of the destination range and press
RETURN The range is copied to the destination.
• The copy operation replaces the old data with the new data.
• Relative addresses are automatically updated.
Example:
1 Enter 3 in Al, 1 in A2, 2 in A3, then enter the formulas 2*A2+$A1 in B2 and
2*A3+$A1 in B3. The addresses A2 and A3 are relative while the address
$A1 is absolute. Relative addresses are updated when copied. Absolute
addresses are never updated.
97

`24,A3+$A1 PITCH:10
3
2
2 7
s.
2. Now copy the range B2..B3 to C2. Note that the formulas of C2 and C3 are
2*B2+$A1 and 2*B3+$A1. Because $A1 is an absolute address, it was not
changed when copied. (See "Absolute and Relative Addresses" on page 97.)
To recalculate the results, refer to "Recalculation" on page 110.
2.032+$A1 PITCH:10
3
1 5 13
3 2 7 17
Copying one Cell to Many CODE
Other Cells
CODE L
laNSOV3EldS
L IND
1. Position the cursor on the cell that you want to copy.

2. Press CODE; + 0 (see Help Menu). This message will appear:
Mark range to be copied. Press RETURN when done.
3. Press (RETURN ) without moving the cursor. This message will appear:
CODE + CD (not LRETuRNM.
5. Move the cursor to the lower-right corner of the range and press NI RN
The cell is copied to the destination range.
• Relative addresses are automatically updated. (See "Copying a Range of
Cells" on page 97 and "Absolute and Relative Addresses" on page 97.)
98

• This variation of the copy function is very useful for automatic input of formulas.
Example:
1. Enter the data shown below in Al ..E1, then enter @SQUARE(A1) in A2.
A2 : @SQUARE(A1) PITCH:10
A 411
2. Now copy the A2 to the range B2..E2.

• To recalculate the results, refer to "Recalculation" on page 110.
@SQUARE{B1) PITCH: 10
A
4 5
2 9 16 25
Deleting Rows and Columns CODE

A
1. Press ttiO-W + (see Help Menu). This menu will appear:
MEAN: SOWS COLUMNS
2. Select ROWS to delete rows (or COLUMNS to delete columns), then press
REWRN,. This message will appear:
Position block cursor. Press RETURN when done.
3. Position the cursor anywhere in the first row (or column) to be deleted. The
machine asks you to specify the number of rows (or columns) to delete, for
example:
Number of rows to..delete
4. Type the number and press (RETURN . The specified number of rows (or
columns) are deleted. Existing data past the deleted rows (columns) are pulled
up (to the left) and any moved formula is updated.
99

Example 1:
1. Enter the data shown below in the range Al ..B3, then enter the formula
@SUM(A1..B3) in cell C5.
@SUM(Al. .B3) PITCH:1O
Mialeek' e
1 1 4
2 2 5
3 3 6
I
2. Now delete row 2. To recalculate the results, refer to "Recalculation" on page

110.
@SUM(Al. .B2) PITCH:10
1
3 6
4 14.
5
133HSCIVRIdS
• When a function is defined on a range, like in the above example, you are not
allowed to delete a row or a column that contains a corner of the range.
Example 2:
1. Using the same initial data as in the above example, delete row 1.
@SUM(?..B2) PITCH:10
3 6
3:
Inserting Blank Rows and Columns CODE
INSERT
1. Press + (1.4110W CEI). This menu will appear:
100

iMith ROWS COLUMNS
2. Select ROWS to insert blank rows (or COLUMNS to insert blank columns), then
press ( RETURN,. This message will appear:
Positron block cursor. Press RETURN when done.
3. Position the cursor anywhere in the first row (or column) where you want the
new rows (columns) inserted. The machine asks you to specify the number
of rows (or columns) to insert, for example:
Number'of rows. to
4. Type the number and press RETURN . The specified number of blank rows
(or columns) are inserted. Existing data beyond the inserted rows (columns)
are pushed down (to the right).
Example 1:
1. Enter the data shown below in the range Al ..B2, then enter the formula
@SUM(Al..B2) in cell C3.
@SUM(Al..B2) PITCH:10
1 3
2 2
3 10
2. Now insert a blank row between row 1 and row 2.
@SUM(Al..B3} PITCH:10
3
2
3 2 4
Example 2:
With the same initial data as in Example 1, insert a blank row between row 2
and row 3.
101

G : @SUM(Al..B21 PITCH:10
A
3
4 10
Example 3:
1. Enter the data shown below in the range A2..62, then enter the formula
(A2*B2) in C2.
(A2*B2) PITCH:10
2 300 2+t6
2. Now insert a blank column between column A and column B.
: (A2*C2)
A
2 300 240
133HSCIV3EldS
Example 4:
With the same initial data as in Example 3, insert a blank column between
column B and column C.
'1D2 (A2*B2) PITCH:10
2 300 0.8
3
If the insertion you wish to make will exceed the limitations of the spreadsheet,
the data in the rows or columns on the far edge will be lost. The system will
warn you of this, and allow you to choose whether to quit the insertion or allow
the data to be lost with this message:
Insert will result in data loss. RETURN to insert or CANCEL to quit.
102

Moving a Range of Cells CODE E
1. Position the cursor on a corner of the range that you want to move.
2. Press (coDE + rti (see Help Menu). This message will appear:
Mark range to be moved. Press RETURN when done.
3. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press (RETURN I. This
(RETURN '. The range is moved to the destination, and the range that you
marked in steps (1), (2), and (3) is cleared.
• The move operation replaces the old data with the new data.
Example:
1. Enter the data shown below, then enter the formula @SUM(Al..B2) in A4.
@SUM(Al..9.2) PITCH:1O
1 3
2 2 4
3
2. Now move the cell A4 to Dl.
@SUMiAl..B2) PITCH:1O
3
2 2 4
103

Printing a Range CODE
PRINT
Printing a range of cells is often a useful step when you are editing a spreadsheet.
It allows you to see how your work will actually look on paper. Remember that the
program also allows you to print an entire spreadsheet file from the SPREADSHEET
INDEX screen.
Before you print, you may use M9 DE) + PrTreH] ) to adjust the pitch to 10, 12,
or 15 characters per inch.
You may also split your spreadsheet manually by inserting page break symbols (4)
with the (coDE + (13 key.
1. Move the cursor to a corner of the range that you want to print and press LCODE
+ LPRiNT ( at) ). This message will appear:
Mark range to print. Press RETURN when done.
2. Move the cursor to the cell in the opposite corner of the range and press
( RETURN j. This message will appear:
Set printer and press RETURN.
Set the printer and press fRETURN ). If the spreadsheet is too wide, you may
133HSOV3EldS
3.
need to insert the sheet of paper horizontally. If you have an HR Series Brother
daisy wheel printer, the machine now asks you to match the daisy wheel to
the selected pitch, for example:
Change to ASCII 10 wheel and press RETURN.
4. Make sure that the daisy wheel installed matches the message specifications,
and press ,REIN.,. Printing starts.
• To pause during printing, press . Press the same key to restart
printing. To cancel printing, press
Functions Available in the Function Menu 1. MU
ALE
1. To display the function menu, press WW1
cpx.pma FORMAT RECALC SORT CLEAR CONV
104

2. To select a function, use 6B and E and press MM.
Adjusting the Width of the Columns

The default width of the columns is 10 characters. However, you may adjust the
width of your column to accommodate the data that you will input (or the data that
is already in the cell). While a maximum to 55 characters (the maximum length of
the input area) may be put into a cell, if there is interfering data in the cells to the
right, only a portion of that data may be viewed. It will still remain resident in that
cell and may be viewed on the input area when the cursor is in that cell. It is not
possible to change the width of an individual cell without changing the width of the
entire column that cell belongs to.
1. Position the cursor anywhere within the column you wish to change and press
. The function menu appears:
PHU FORMAT RECALL SORT CLEAR CONV
2. Select COLUMN, and press This menu will appear:
FILL FREEZE RELEASE
SPREADSHEET
3. Select WIDTH and press CRETWir. The letter of the column will appear in the
input area, followed with a number indicating its current width,
Column`' A width 10
and this message will appear:
Mark columns to change width of. Press RETURN when done.
4. €E3
Use or gi) to mark the columns that you want to change, and press
The marked columns are indicated in the input area (for example, A-C if you
marked columns A, B, and C),
Width
105

Enter new column width and press RETURN.
5. Type the new width in the input area (maximum 55) and press (r-REruRN,. The
width of the marked columns is adjusted.
Filling a Range with Numbers

This function is useful when you want to number rows or columns quickly, or when
you need numbers in a range in order to check how math functions are working.
As an example, we are going to show how to create a calendar (let's limit it to June
1990).
1. Enter the data shown below and adjust the width of the columns as desired.
SAT PITCH:10
' .1 June
2
SUN
I MON
5 TUE
6 WED
7 THU
a FRI
8 51 •
133HSOValdS
2. Move the cursor to B3 and press =emu: to display the function menu.
FORMAT RECALL SORT CLEAR CONV
3. Select COLUMN and press rflauRtil. This menu will appear:

WIDTH FREEZE RELEASE
4. Select FILL and press . This message will appear:
Mark range to be filled. Press RETURN when done.
5. Move the cursor to F9 to mark the range B3..F9 and press RETURNJ. The
machine asks you to enter a starting value.
106

• The fill function will fill the marked range from the upper-left corner down, then
starting from the top of the second column, and so on. Three values are
necessary: starting, jumping, and ending values. The starting value is written
in the upper-left corner. Next numbers are calculated by adding the jumping
value to the previously written value. Filling stops when the calculated value
exceeds the ending value or when the markedrange is filled, whichever comes
first.
6. Since June First is Friday, enter -4 for the starting value. The machine will
ask you to enter the jumping value and the ending value. Enter 1 for the
jumping value and 30 for the ending value. The range will be automatically
filled when you press ,7.11ETVRN, to enter the ending value.
-4.00000 PITCH:10
1 June
2
3 SUN 3 10 17 24
4 MON -3 4 11 18 25
TUE -2 5 12 19 26
WED -1 6 13 20 27
THU 0 7 14 21 28
FRI 1 8 15 22 29
SAT 2 9 16 23 30
7. Delete the contents of cells B3, B4, B5,B6, and B7.
Freezing Columns on the Screen

Because this spreadsheet is wider than the display screen, you might find at some
point that you wish to keep the first column(s) where you can see them while editing
the rightmost columns.
1. Press 11.1 .) to display the function menu.
FORMAT RECALC SORT CLEAR CONV
2. Select COLUMN, and press c'4 This menu will appear:
WIDTH FILL RELEASE
3. Select FREEZE and press LRETURN 3. The system asks you to indicate the
columns to be frozen. This message will appear:
107

Move block cursor to right of columns to be frozen and press RETURN.
4. Freezing will always affect the first columns, from column A to the column just
before the column that you choose at this step. Position the cursor and press
rfignANJ An indicator will tell you which columns are frozen, for example, if
you positioned the cursor on column C:
1 June s.
SUN 3 10 17 24
MON 4 11 16 25
TUE 5 12 19 26
5. Now, if you move the cursor to the rightmost columns, you will still see the
frozen columns on screen.
• Only one group of columns can be frozen at a time. Rows cannot be frozen.
• When you want to release the frozen columns (you must do that to be able to
move the cursor into the frozen columns for editing), proceed as for freezing,
but select RELEASE in step (3). A message will tellyou that the frozen columns
have been released:
133HSOV38dS
Frozen columns have been released.
Changing the Format of Numeric Data

This system is quite capable of handling fractional numbers, though it displays the
result in decimal notation. Fractional numbers may even be typed in the input area
as fractions, but they will still be displayed on the grid as decimals. The system
correctly stores their values.
The machine is set to display no decimal digits, though you may modify this using
the format function, up to five digits. This function also allows you to display dollar
figures with a dollar symbol and two decimal places. It also can display percentage
data with the percentage symbol to a specified number of decimal places, again,
up to five.
To use the format function, proceed as follows:
1. Position the cursor on a corner of the range to be formatted and press (MENU,
The function menu appears:
108

MENU:', COLUMN 7:! FORMA`''` RECALC SORT CLEAR CONE'
2. Select FORMAT and preSS RETURN , . Specify the range and press (AVIAN 1
again. A menu of options appears:
MENU: FIXED.- - CURRENCY PERCENT NC DISPLAY
3. Select an option and press ( RETURN L The following operations depend on the
option that you selected.
• Changing the Number of Decimal Places
1. Select FIXED from the FORMAT menu to set the number of decimal places that
you wish to display and press LRETuRN,
MENU: 1 2 3 4 5 Select numbercf decimal places.
2. Select the number of decimal places and press (RETURN 3. This menu will
appear:
MENU: NO COMMAS COMMAS
3. Select COMMAS if you want commas to separate the thousands or NO COMMAS

if you do not. Press (RETuRNI").
Displaying Dollar Symbols
MENU: FIXED CDRRENCY PERCENT NO DISPLAY
1. Select CURRENCY from the FORMAT menu to display numbers with two decimal
places and a dollar symbol, then press ( RETURN . This menu will appear:
:IERp:DIPLAT NO ZERO DISPLAY
2. Select ZERO DISPLAY if you want zeroes to be displayed, or NO ZERO DISPLAY if

you do not. Press (RETURN. This menu will appear:
MENU: NO COMMAS COMMAS
109

3. Select COMMAS if you want commas to separate the thousands or NO COMMAS
if you do not. Press CRW:l.
• Displaying Percentages
FIXED CURRENCY PERCENT. NC DISPLAY
1. Select PERCENT from the FORMAT menu to display percentages (the result will
be multiplied by 100 will be followed with a percentage symbol).
1 2 3 4 Select number decimal places.
2. Select the number of decimal places and press

• Hiding Numeric Data
7
MEITUI FIXED CURRENCY PERCENT . WO DISPLAY •
1. Select NO DISPLAY from the FORMAT menu and press FETuRN . This menu will
appear:
MENU DISPLAY NO DISPLAY

IMHSOVaEldS
2. Select NO DISPLAY to hide data (or select DISPLAY to display data that have
been hidden) and press (iRETORt47,4)
Hidden data will still be in memory but will not be displayed on the grid. For example,
you might have to split complex calculations in more simple steps. In that case,
you do not need to display or print intermediate results.
Recalculation
When you input or edit numeric data, the result is automatically displayed in the
selected cell. However, if other cells use this data in a formula, these are not
automatically updated. In order to have all results match the new data you must
recalculate.
1. Press tlittfiul to display the function menu.
Mtn!: COLUMN FORMAT SORT CLEAR CONV
2. Select RECALC, and press
110

IMPORTANT: If you are using formulas referencing to cells that are them-
selves referencing to other cells, it might sometimes happen that the system
cannot give the correct results with a single call of the recalculation function.
In such cases, call the recalculation function again until a further call does
not change any result.
Organizing Your Data

It is important to realize that you can create files of textual information as well as
numbers and formulas. The next example will illustrate this.
• Sorting a Range
When you update a file of names, addresses and phone numbers, you usually add
data at the end of the file. To facilitate later reference, however, you need some
logical organization. Alphabetical order is commonly used. The sorting feature
shown here will save you time and effort in the organization of your data. To prepare:
1. Enter the data shown in the illustration.
A B C D E
1 Marsh Henry Miamiburg OH 45342
2 Anderson John Denver CO 82222
3 Jackson Howard Stanford CA 56904
4 Bennet William Westfield NJ 28854
5 Higgins Ruth Cambridge MA 11000
6 Carter David Dallas TX 76021
7 Bender William Freeport VT 66622
8 Higgins Joyce Atlanta GA 30341
9 Fox Terry Fremont CA 94537
10 Lee Kevin Bedford TX 76021
2. if you wish, make several copies of the data (using the copy function -- CODE
+ Cal ) so that you will be able to try several different types of sorts.
You are now ready to go on with the first example:
1. Position the cursor on Al and press t.MENui to display the function menu.
MENU: COLUMN FORMAT RECALC SORT CLEAR CONV
2. Select SORT and press RETURN This menu will appear:
in

merrui SORT'' SELECT SORT & SELECT
3. Select SORT and press RETURN . This message will appear:
Mark range to be sorted. Press RETURN when done.
We are going to rearrange the data in alphabetical order according to the last names
(column A). It is important that you mark all the columns so that all data will move
together with the names.
4. Move the cursor to El 0 to mark the range Al ..El 0, and press L RETURN ). The
system will ask you to enter the name of the column that the column will be
sorted by (primary key)
Primary keY
Enter column of primary sort key and press RETURN.
This system allows for double sorting -- primary and secondary. You wish the data
to be sorted according to the last names (column A). This is the "primary key". The
133HSCIVRIdS
primary key must always be in the marked range.

5. Type A and press RETURN ). The system will ask you to enter the name of the
column that will be used for secondary or internal sorting
Secondary key
Enter column of secondary sort key and press RETURN.
If two or more persons have the same last name, you will require secondary sorting
to maintain proper organization. Use the first name (column B) for secondary
sorting.
• When you do not wish a secondary sort to take place, simply press RETURN
without entering anything.
6. Type B and press RETURN:. This menu will appear:
112

MENU : ASCENDING DESCENDING
If you select ASCENDING, the data will be arranged in natural alphabetical order.
DESCENDING will place it in the reverse order.
7. Select ASCENDING and press RETURN j. The last menu will appear.
MENU: ALPHABETIC NUMERIC
8. Since the data is alphanumeric, select ALPHABETIC and press RETURN ,. Your
data will be alphabetically arranged, automatically.
A B C D E
1 Anderson John Denver CO 82222
2 Bender William Freeport VT 66622
3 Bennet William Westfield NJ 28854
4 Carter David Dallas TX 76021
5 Fox Terry Fremont CA 94537
6 Higgins Joyce Atlanta GA 30341
7 Higgins Ruth Cambridge MA 11000
8 Jackson Howard Stanford CA 56904
9 Lee Kevin Bedford TX 76021
10 Marsh Henry Miamiburg OH 45342
You may, of course, use both alphabetic and numeric, ascending and descending
sorts to organize the data. You may also use different primary and secondary keys
(such as by city and first name) to put your data in the order most convenient to
your purpose.
• Selecting Data From a Range
The SELECT option in the SORT menu allows you to print rows of data that match a
specified condition. However, you may only select numeric data. In the example
used previously, the only numeric data was the zip code, so we will use this data
here.
1. Position the cursor on a corner of the range you want to select from, then
press (MENU). The function menu appears:
113

2. Select SORT and press RETURN 1. This menu will appear:
MENU: SORT SELECT SORT & SELECT
3. Choose SELECT and press RETURN This message will appear:
Mark range to select from. Press RETURN when done.
4. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press ( RETURN ), The
system will ask you to enter the name of the column to be used
Select Column .A-E :
Enter the select column and press RETURN.
5. Type a letter (E in our example) and press ('RETURN A menu of matching

conditions will appear:
133HSCIV3EidS
MENU: EQUAL NOT EQUAL LESS GREATER BETWEEN NOT BETWEEN
If you select EQUAL, NOT EQUAL, LESS, or GREATER, the system will ask you to enter
a numeric value equal or not equal to what, etc.). If you select BETWEEN or NOT
BETWEEN, you are requested to enter the limit values of the bracket.
6. Select EQUAL and pressRETURN . The system will ask you to enter the value.
Equal to
We want the list of people whose zip code is 76021.

7. Type 76021 and press [RETURN . You are now requested to set the printer.
114

8. Set the printer and press RETURN If you are using a Brother HR Series Daisy
Wheel printer, install the proper wheel and press ( RETURN The printout will
look as follows:
Carter David Dallas TX 76021

Lee Kevin Bedford TX 76021
Sorting & Selecting Data from a Range
mENT.; COLUMN FORMAT RECALC ):RT, CLEAR CCNV
MENU: SORT SELECT SORT & SELECT
This third option (SORT & SELECT) allows you to sort and select in one operation.
This is useful when you want the printout to be sorted. To try out this option, you
may use a copy of the data in the previous example.
After you select SORT & SELECT, the machine first sorts the data and then selects
according to the specified criteria. Simply follow the instructions for the option SORT,
then the instructions for the option SELECT.
Clearing a Range
The CLEAR option of the function menu allows you to quickly clear a range.
1. Position the cursor on a corner of the range to be cleared and press MENU).
MENU: COLUMN FORMAT RECALC SORT CLEAR CONY
2. Select CLEAR and press R€TURN J. This message will appear:
Mark range to be cleared. Press RETURN when done.
3. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press RERANJ. The
range is cleared.
• Attributes (bold, underline) and format (currency, percentage, etc.) are all
cleared.
115

Converting a Range
You may sometimes wish to include data from the spreadsheet into a document.
To do this, first type the spreadsheet data and convert it into a Create Document
file as explained below. You will then be able to retrieve that file in Create Document
mode and add text.
1. Position the cursor on a corner of the range that you wish to convert and press
,MENU . The function menu appears:
2. Select CONV and press I RETURN . This message will appear:
Mark range to convert. Press RETURN when done.
3. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the range and press , RETURN`). This
Insert destination disk and press RETURN.

133HSaraidS
4. Insert a disk, then press RETURN J. A list of the Create Document files stored
on the disk will appear. The machine asks you to input a file name for the
converted file.
Type new filename and press RETURN.

FILENAME: xxxxxxxxii
5. Type a file name and press L RETURN ,. This message will appear while the file
is converted:
Converting the file....please wait.
and will be replaced with this message when the process is completed:
Converting completed.
116

You are now in command mode of the INPUT/EDIT screen, and the message
will disappear as soon as you hit a key.
• if all columns cannot fit between the margins, this message will appear:
Line (s) truncated.
117

File Operations
The current spreadsheet is automatically stored in the memory if you switch the
power off while editing. However, you are not allowed to save a file in the memory
under a specific file name. All file operations described in this section will refer to
the disk. The disk used to save spreadsheet files can be a disk that you also use
to save Create Document files. Remember to initialize a new disk before attempting
to save data on it (see "Initializing New Disks" on page 12).
Saving Your Spreadsheet Work CODE MENU
).
FILE
1. When your spreadsheet is completed, press

following message appears:
tnizi („MENU, The
ti
Insert data disk. Press RETURN to save, press CODE+D to abandon.
2. If you have nothing worth saving, simply press + E. The SPREAD-

SHEET INDEX appears.
If you want to save your file, press . You are prompted to enter a file
name:
133HSCIV3EidS

FILENAME: II
3. Type a file name and press (RETURN . The file is saved on the disk and the
SPREADSHEET INDEX screen list is updated.
A file name may be composed of capital and small letters, numbers and
hyphens. No other characters are allowed. The machine distinguishes
between upper and lower case letters: you may have two different files called
"FILET" and "filet ".
To correct an error while typing a file name, use , fcaDE (C3 ),
CODE ÷ (LINE our ( ) or move the cursor with ) and (i) and retype the
file name. Pressing cANca allows you to escape.
If you type a file name that exists already, the machine asks you if you want
to overwrite the old file:
118

Press RETURN , to replace the old file with the new one, or press (CANCEL. to
quit.
• If there is not sufficient space remaining on the disk to contain the file you
wish to save, the system will inform you and prompt you to insert a new disk
with this message:
Disk is full, please try again with new disk. Press RETURN.
Insert another data disk and press (RETURN J.
Retrieving a Spreadsheet File

1. At the blank spreadsheet INPUT/EDIT screen, insert the disk containing the
file you want to retrieve and press Loom) + (MENU ) to access the
SPREADSHEET INDEX.
2. Select the file using E, CD, E, and ). (Select *NEWFILE to start creating
a new file from scratch.)
3. Press ( RETURN to switch to the INPUT/EDIT screen where the file can be
edited.
Making a Copy of a File CODE
1 Insert the disk containing the file you want to copy. Press (axej (FILE;
( (MENU) ) to view the SPREADSHEET INDEX, then select the file using CD,
F, and 0.
2. Press (MENU ) to display the function menu.
MENU: 'COPY ' DELETE RENAME CONV PRINT
3. Select COPY and press (RETURN. This message will appear:
• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press CODE ÷ 1 (see help menu).
4. Insert a disk and press RETURN . After a few seconds, the SPREADSHEET
INDEX screen of the disk appears and you are prompted to enter a new file
name:
119

• You may copy a file on the same disk. Simply leave the current disk in the
drive when prompted to insert the destination disk.

FILENAME: XXXXXXXXM
5. Type a new file name (one that does not already exist on the disk), and press
(RETURN If you enter a file name that is already used on the disk, this message
will appear:
6. Press I to quit and type a new file name. After the file has been copied,
the system will tell you when the operation is completed:
Copying completed.
Deleting a File CODE
1. Insert the disk containing the file you want to delete. Press (voDe] +
( (emV) ) to view the SPREADSHEET INDEX, then select the file using a
133HSCIVRIdS
and E.
2. Press 1J to display the function menu.
COPY IIELET : RENAME CONY PRINT
3. Select DELETE and press ETURN . This message will appear:
• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press tcoDE + E (see help menu).
4. Press (7RETURN:. to confirm. The file is deleted and the index is updated.
120

Renaming a File CODE
1. Insert the disk containing the file you want to rename. Press (000E I + (FILE,
( €MENU: ) to view the SPREADSHEET INDEX, then select the file using 1,
, and C.
Press (MENU to display the function menu.
MENU: COPY DELETE RENAME CONV PRINT
3. Select RENAME and press RETURN ). This message will appear:

FILENAME: •
• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press 600E) + (see help menu).
4. Type a new file name (one that does not already exist on the disk), and press
RETURN.j.
Converting a Spreadsheet File CODE 0

JUST
The system allows you to change a spreadsheet file into a text file. You should
create the spreadsheet file first. After the spreadsheet file is saved, convert it into
a text file as explained below. Then switch to the Create Document mode and
retrieve the converted file. You are now free to add any text to the file.
To convert a spreadsheet file:
1. Insert the disk containing the file you want to convert. Press (CoDE + WILE to
view the SPREADSHEET INDEX, then select the file using E, ED, and
2. Press MENU to display the function menu.
ME COPY DELETE RENAME PRINT
3. Select CONV and press cam'). This message will appear:
121

• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press(com , La: (see help menu).
4. To store the converted file on the current disk, simply press [- RETURN . To store
the converted file to a different disk, insert the new disk and press ( RETURN .
The machine asks you to input a file name:

FILENAME: XXXXXXXXI
5. Type a file name and press RETURN ). While the file is being converted, the
following message is displayed
Converting the file....please wait.
and will be replaced with this message when the operation is completed:
Converting completed.
• If all columns cannot fit between the margins, this message will appear:
Linefs) truncated.
133HSOVRIdS
0
Printing a File •
CODE
PRINT
1. Insert the disk containing the file you want to print. Press (CODE +
LMENUI ) to view the SPREADSHEET INDEX, then select the file using CD,
E, and 11 .
2. Press mENuJ to display the function menu.
COPY DELETE RENAME CONY PRINT
3. Select PRINT and press (RETURN'.' . This message will appear:
• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press 'CODE tpRitsrr ) (see
help menu).
122

4. Insert a sheet of paper and press (R€TURN . If you are using a Brother HR
Series daisy wheel printer, the system now prompts you to insert an ASCII
daisy wheel (KB I) of the appropriate pitch. Install the wheel and press
(RETURN or simply press (RETURN) if the correct daisy wheel is already
installed.
5. During printing, you may press (.{SPACE BAR) to pause and resume printing.
You may also press icANcEL to quit.
• If the data exceeds the printing capabilities, the data will be truncated (cut off).
It is not possible to change the pitch on the SPREADSHEET INDEX screen.
If the spreadsheet is too wide, try inserting paper horizontally. If it is still too
wide, go back to the INPUT/EDIT screen and select a higher pitch or print only
a range of the spreadsheet.
• Remember that the system allows you to input page break symbols ( ) to
signal the printer to stop printing for a paper change.
123

The Templates
The Spreadsheet Templates are pre-formatted files to be used with the Spreadsheet
mode. These files allow for easy creation of most standard spreadsheets. They
are stored on the Template disk that comes with your machine. The Templates
are write-protected, which means that they cannot be erased and that they will
always be available on the Template disk in their original form.
For all templates, just remember, you enter the data in the blank cells only.
Never enter data into the cells that contain a formula.
Listed below are the templates that we have already designed for your use. These
files come with an easy-to-use format. All you need to do is enter your data. The
cells which are supposed to display a result already contain the appropriate formulas
and format. Never enter data in the cells that already contain a formula.
After you have completed your work on the template spreadsheet, you may give
your template a file name and save it to a data disk. Each time you recall a template
from the Template disk, a new blank file appears. In order to recall a template that
you previously worked with, simply recall it from the data disk by the file name you
assigned.
Description of the Templates

INTRO - This template is actually an overview file that contains a reading intro-
duction to the Spreadsheet. This template discusses some of the features and
133HSCIV3EIdS
capabilities of the Spreadsheet Program.
TELEPHONE AND ADDRESS DIRECTORY - This template allows you to keep

an organized listing of names and addresses. With the sort capability, you are able
to rearrange this file alphabetically after each addition or edit.
CHECKBOOK - This Checkbook template resembles the ledgers that you receive
from your bank. It calculates the balance after you input your deposits and with-
drawals. After entering your deposits and withdrawals, select RECALC from the
function menu to process the balance column. If you later make changes or
additions to the data you entered in the checkbook, simply use the RECALC function
to determine the new balance.
MONTHLY BUDGETING - This template helps you keep your personal finances
in order. It outlines your monthly expenses for you.
Once your expenses are itemized, use the RECALC function to determine your
budget results. Later, if you make changes or additions to the budget, simply use
the RECALC function to determine the new totals.
124

SALES ANALYSIS - This template helps monitor actual versus projected sales
results by sales persons. Enter the data for all the cells with the exception of the
cells containing formulas (zeros). After you have entered the information for each
sales person. use the RECALC function to determine the results. Later. if you make
changes or additions to the template. simply use the RECALC function to see the
new results.
ANNUAL YIELD (COMPOUND) - This template figures annual yield according to

the annual interest rate. Simply type in the annual interest rate. Use the RECALC
function to see the results.
SAVING PLANNER - This template calculates your savings over a specified period
of time. Simply enter the requested data. Use the RECALC function to determine
the results.
MONTHLY PAYMENT OF LOAN - This template calculates your monthly payments

and lists the amount of interest and principal paid per month, for one year. Enter
the requested data. Use the RECALC function to see the results for one year.
Retrieving a Template
1. Select 3. SPREADSHEET from the main menu.
2. Insert the Template disk and press (coos, + (FILE) ( 'MENU) ) to display the
SPREADSHEET INDEX. The list of the Templates appears.
3. Select the desired template with the cursor and press ( RE-MN'. The
spreadsheet appears on the screen. As you can see, the format has been
set up for you already. Move your cursor around the screen. You can see
that some columns have formulas already set up for calculations.
A Practice Exercise
For practice, recall the template SALES and follow these steps to enter data.
1. Move your cursor to the right of COMPANY and type DONNLIN SALES
COMPANY. Press RETURN
2. Move the cursor down to the right of DIVISION and type WESTERN. Press
RETURN ).
3. Move the cursor down to the right of DATE and type '5/31/90 (do not forget
the format mark). Press ( RETURN ).
• Each time an alphanumeric data looks like a number or a formula, type a single
quote mark at the beginning to tell the machine that this data is not to be
calculated. The single quote is called a "format mark". Other format marks
are available. For details, see "Format Marks" on page 83.
125

4. Move the cursor down under SALESPERSON NAME and type James Elliott.
Press ( RETURN; •
5. Move the cursor under PROJECTED UNITS and type 17000. Press [ RETURN;.
6. Move the cursor under PROJECTED SALES and type 75000. Press [ RETURN
7. Enter amounts for ACTUAL UNITS and ACTUAL SALES.
• The remaining cells to the right display "0" or "0.00%", this indicates that a
formula has been entered in these cells. Do not enter data in these cells. If
data is entered, the formulas will be deleted.
8. Continue to enter data for each row, remembering not to enter data in the cells
with formulas already set up.
Practice Recalculation
Formulas are used to automatically display a result that depends of the contents
of other cells.
1. Press . ENUI to display the function menu.
2. Use j and C+) to select RECALC and press RetuRN ). This automatically
updates all formulas.
Practice Printing
133HSaValdS
This systems provides two methods for printing spreadsheets: from the INPUT/EDIT
screen or from the SPREADSHEET INDEX screen.
From the INPUT/EDIT Screen

While you are editing your spreadsheet in the INPUT/EDIT screen, press coc/E7
,PRINT ( O ). The machine will ask you to mark the range that you want to print.
This feature is very convenient when you have a very wide spreadsheet, and need
to print only a part of it. Another advantage of this method is that, on the INPUT/EDIT
screen, you are free to select the pitch. For details about this method, see Printing
a Range" on page 104.
From the SPREADSHEET INDEX Screen

After saving your spreadsheet file, you can print the entire file from the SPREAD-
SHEET INDEX screen by pressing the same `cam) + 'PRINT) ( CD ) keys. For details
about this method, see "Printing a File" on page 122.
126

Practice Saving the File
For complete instructions regarding file saving, please refer to "Saving Your
Spreadsheet Work" on page 118.
1. Press (CODE + (FILE; ( (mENul ). This message will appear:
Insert data disk. Press RETURN to save. Press CODE+D to abandon.
2. Insert a Data Disk and press RETURN This message will appear:
3. Give your file a name, then press I RETURN to save it to the disk and display
the Spreadsheet Index.
If this is the first time you are using the data disk, you will need to initialize
(format) the disk before saving.
127

133HSOVRIdS
128

Create Document
How to Start?
1. To start working in the Create Document mode, switch the machine on to
display the MAIN MENU.
« MAIN MENU >>

4 .-
- TicREATIVDOCUMENT : 9. FAX
5. LINE BY LINE D. DISK APPLICATION
Type ngmber or move cursor and press RETURN; Press MENV for more seleCtions.
2. Movethecursorto4.CREATEDocumENT,andpress[RE-rusiiI.TheINPUT/ED1T
screen described on page 131 appears. The file name displayed on the
upper-left corner of the INPUT/EDIT screen is *NEWF1LE, and you can start
creating a new document.
if You Want to Retrieve an Old Document for further Editing

If, instead of creating a new document, you wish to work on a document that you
have already created, you must first call the MEMORY INDEX screen and retrieve
the file. For details, see:
• "Retrieving Previous Work" on page 195.
On-Screen Help Information •••

CODE H
ELP
Since this machine is designed to last for many years, you may need to review the
meaning of a function you have not used in a while. Simply press (cooE) + HELP
( ). Short definitions of the functions will appear on the screen. To return to the
normal screen, press ( or (IJ
• Since the details of each operation are not provided, the help information is
not a replacement for careful reading of this Guide.
129

FILE
When your work is finished, press CODE , 1MENU k ) to save your work.
If you are working on a *NEWFILE, and turn your unit off without saving it, the next
time you switch the machine on, the INPUT/EDIT screen will re-appear in the same
condition that you left it.
Once your file is saved, you may select it on the MEMORY INDEX screen and
press [CODE + (PRINT) ( C ) to print it.
For more details, see:
"Saving Your Work" on page 192.
"Printing a File in Memory" on page 195.
1N3N1000 31V380
130

INPUT/EDIT Screen
The INPUT/EDIT screen shown below appears after you select 4. CREATE DOCUMENT
from the MAIN MENU. All text input and editing is done on that screen.
MRG:XX
DEAD:XX
PITCH:XX L.SPACE:X.X P ns:x E5 D 12/16 Sun

,t
XXXXXXXX P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX KB:X SPELL JST EXP BLD CNT INS SHIFT 12:56AM
2 3 5 6 •
Scale Status Line

4
I I
Scale Cursor
Hot Zone
Text Cursor /illessage Area Text Area
Format Symbol & Dead Column fr
Start typing your text. Press. FILEI to finish.
Seale
The scale assists you in determining jour position on a page. The numbers indicate
the position from the left edge of the paper. The scale cursor (underline) indicates
the current column. Other symbols remind you of some format settings (see table
below).
• The scale can be disabled in rder to get one additional line of text on the
screen. For details, see "Disat ling the Scale" on page 186.
SyMbols displayed on the scale

Symbol Meaning
Po ition of the left margin
R Po ition of the right margin
Poition of a tab stop
Po ition of a decimal tab stop
11 Be inning of the hot zone
0, 1, 2,... Ab olute position from the lett edge of the paper
Message Area
This line is reserved for guide messages (prompts) that ask you a question, give
direction or display error messages. When no prompt and no error message are
displayed, this line is used for your text.
• For a list of error messages, see "Error Messages" on page 267.
131

Status Line
The status line shows you the current settings. Some indicators are followed with
a value and are always displayed. They indicate the cursor's page, line and column
position. Pressing F----
,codE,i will display the selected pitch and line spacing. The
indicators on the right appear (in reversed color) only when the corresponding
function has been activated. For a complete list of indicators, refer to the table
below.
Indicators of the INPUT/EDIT screen

Indicator Meaning
xxxxxxxx Name of the current file
P:XX Number of the current page
L:XXX Number of the current line
COL:XXX Number of the current column
PITCH:XX Current pitch (10, 12, or 15); appears when cope` is
pressed
L.SPACE:X.X Current line spacing (1.0, 1.5, or 2.0); appears when
tam) iS pressed
KB:X Current keyboard selection ( I or II)
SHIFT On if the keyboard is in uppercase mode
CAPS On if the keyboard is in caps lock mode
INS On when the insert mode is activated
EXP On when the expand function is activated
P BS:X Displays the superimposed character when the cursor is
on the base character
DEAD:XX Displays the dead character when the cursor is on the
base character
MRG:XX Displays the label number of the data to be automati-
cally inserted while printing with the merge function.
BLD On when the bold function is activated
IN3I111100(131,V380
CNT On when the continuous underline function is activated

WRD On when the word underline function is activated
JST On when the justify function is activated
SPELL On when the Spell Checker is activated
Text Area
This is where the text that you type will appear. The only part you cannot use is
the dead column (to the left of column 0), which is reserved for the "format
change" symbol " E ". The text cursor (solid box) indicates where you are. Other
symbols appear in the text to remind you of the format functions that you used, but
will not be printed (see table below).
132

• The text area can be split in order to display two documents simultaneously.
(For details, see "Displaying two Documents" on page 187.)
Symbols displayed in the text area

Symbol Meaning
H CENTERING BETWEEN MARGINS: displayed at the
left of the centered string when the centering function is
activated
P4 CENTERING BETWEEN TABS: displayed at the left of
the centered string when the centering function is acti-
vated
FORMAT CHANGE: displayed in the dead column, in
front of the first line of a reformatted paragraph
INDENT CLEAR: displayed at the end of an indented
paragraph when WOE + 'NOW1 ( RETuRN ) is
pressed
LINE FEED: displayed at the end of a paragraph when
tote ; is pressed
n MERGE CODE: displayed at the cursor position when
fmagi + [MOODE ( (k) ) is pressed
PAGE BREAK: displayed at the end of a paragraph to
indicate that the next part of the document starts on a
new page
-•0 PARAGRAPH INDENT: displayed at the left of a tab
stop when the cursor has been moved with cope) +
rpm ( (TAB )
PERMANENT SPACE: displayed at the cursor position
when ) + (`(SPACEBAR)) is pressed
RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH: displayed at the left of the
aligned string when the right margin flush function has
been activated
TAB: displayed at the left of a tab stop when the cursor
has been moved with TAB)
133

Function Menu MENU
A
FILE
When you press (MENU;, a menu of functions appears on top of the screen. The
use of the menu is very simple and will be briefly described here.
1. To display the menu, press (MENU . The leftmost function (STYLE) is auto-
matically selected.
STYLE BLOCK C TR/ RMF SPELL ABBR./ THR SEARCH FORM PAGE
2. Use and CD to select a function.

3. Press RETURN_ or A sub-menu appears below the selected function.
4. Use CD and 0 to select a function and press RETURN to activate the function.
Press (ziwcaj to return to the normal screen when the menu is displayed,
and to the menu when a sub-menu is displayed. Use CD and CD to switch from
a sub-menu to another.
Accelerators
Once you get acquainted with the menu, you will use "accelerators". The accel-
erator for each function is displayed in bold on the menu and sub-menus. For
example, the accelerator for CTR/RMF is "C". Typing "C" (either lower or upper case)
while the main menu is displayed immediately shows the CTR/RMF sub-menu. On
this sub-menu, the accelerator for the RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH function is "R".
Typing "R" when the CTR/RMF sub-menu is displayed immediately activates the
RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH function and returns to the normal INPUT/EDIT screen.
Short-cut Keys
imnooa 31V380
Some functions can be activated without displaying the menu. For example,
pressing mix) +D from the normal INPUT/EDIT screen immediately activates
the RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH function. Keys like Impel + D are called "short-cut" keys.
The next table gives a list of the functions available on the menu of the INPUT/EDIT
screen. Accelerators are indicated in bold. Available short-cut keys are indicated
in the third column. Note that some functions cannot be activated with short-cut
keys.
134

Function Menu of the INPUT/EDIT screen
Function Sub-menu Short-cut Key Page
Menu
STYLE BOLD (CODE I + EEI! 150

UNDERLINE (CODE ; + af 151
EXPAND No short cut 152
SUPER/SUB ON/OFF (CODE I + C / (CODE , + Ej 152
BLOCK COPY (CODE + 157
DELETE (CODE, + 159
MOVE (CODE' + 160
CTR/RMF CENTERING (corm +G 154
RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH tcooE) + E 155
SPELL SPELL CHECK (woe) + (SPELL, 168
USER DICTIONARY MAINTENANCE No short cut 172
USER DICTIONARY LOAD No short cut 174
USER DICTIONARY SAVE No short cut 175
ABBR/THR ABBREVIATED PHRASE MAINTENANCE No short cut 179
ABBREVIATED PHRASE LOAD No short cut 181
ABBREVIATED PHRASE SAVE No short cut 182
EDIT THESAURUS No short cut 176
TYPE THESAURUS No Short cut 178
SEARCH SEARCH No short cut 162
REPLACE No short cut 164
HYPHEN SCAN No short cut 165
FORM PAPER SIZE No short cut 183
HEADER No short cut 185
FOOTER No short cut 185
SCALE LINE ON/OFF No short cut 186
DUAL SCREEN No short cut 187
CHANGE SCREEN (CODE) + 4 188
PAGE PAGE BREAK No short cut 190
PAGE PRINT (coos + [PRINT) ( ) 191
135

Typing on the Display
Type your text just as you would on a typewriter. The text appears on the screen
instead of being printed on paper.
If you make a mistake, use (as. to delete. For more details about corrections,
see "Revising Text -- Basic Functions" on page 140.
Hot Zone
The last six columns before the right margin are defined as the "hot zone".
The " N " symbol on the scale corresponds to the hot zone point. Your machine
knows how to break text so that it automatically "wraps" words to the next line once
typing reaches the hot zone area.
Word Wrap
The "word wrap" function allows you to type a paragraph continuously without being
concerned about carrier returns. In the hot zone, when a word is going to extend
beyond the right margin, the word and the cursor will be moved to the next line
automatically. You need only to press ( RETURN to end a line and start a new
paragraph.
The word wrap function is always active when using the screen. This feature permits
continuous typing and helps build typing speed. The text cursor automatically
moves to the next line whenever a space or hyphen is typed in the hot zone.
Permanent Space CODE (SPACE BAR)
Permanent spaces entered by pressing i cooel + (SPACE BAR) are special spaces
that link words together, protecting them from being separated on different lines.
IN3V4300 31V380
A permanent space is displayed with the symbol " " and is considered part of the
two words it links. Such a space is never adjusted by the automatic justification
function -- and does not cause the cursor to jump to the next line when entered in
the hot zone.
Permanent Hyphen CODE

-.e
A permanent hyphen, entered with (ooDET + 0, is for words that always require a
hyphen (mother-in-law, for example). In the hot zone, a permanent hyphen does
not send the cursor to the next line. Outside the hot zone, all hyphens are
permanent, so it is not necessary to use (wog)
136

Getting Many Different Characters
The keyboard can be switched to KB:I or KB:II.
In both modes, the character keys can be used in combination with (-SHIF-r,, to obtain
uppercase characters, or with (cone;, to obtain extra characters. A permanent
backspace can also be used to superimpose a character to another in order to
obtain a composed character, like ¥, that is not directly available on the keyboard.
When the keyboard is switched to KB:I, "dead keys" can be used to obtain letters
with diacritic.
Switching the Keyboard CODE
KB
The display on this multilingual organizer supports European languages written

with the Roman alphabet.
While typing your text, you must tell the machine which keyboard you are using in
order to have the characters properly displayed on the screen. This is done by
pressing (CODEi + ( O ). These keys toggles between KB:I (ASCII keyboard)
and KB:II (American keyboard).
The characters available with KB:II are indicated on the right half of the key tops.
When the right half of a key top is empty (letter and number keys, for example),
you may assume that you will get the same characters in KB:! and KB:II.
• It is possible to read a text file created with this machine on a Brother Word
Processor or vice versa. KB:11 on this machine correspond to KB:1 (Standard)
on the wordprocessors, and the characters are read without any change. KB:!
on this machine corresponds to KB:11 on the word processors. However some
characters will be altered as shown below.
PN-4400 Word Proces- PN-4400 Word Proces-

sors sors
N ' i
8 0
@ fi I i,
# 9 } #
[ . 1 £
< I I ¥
Symbol characters (KB:m) will be displayed in half tone.
137

Lowercase and Uppercase Characters SHIFT
CODE CAPS
SHIFT LOCK
ti
CAPS
SHIFT LOCK
te 4
To obtain a capital letter, hold down (sEuFr and press the corresponding letter key.
Letter keys are the same in KB:I and KB:II.
While LsHirr is pressed down, the SHIFT indicator appears on the screen. That
indicator disappears as soon as you release ,SHIFT.).
With character keys other than letter keys, you obtain the characters:on the upper
half of the key tops when the keyboard is shifted.
When you need to type long strings of both capital letters and numbers, like "ACCT.
NO. BC104", press (CAPS). This shifts the letter keys but leaves the other character
keys unshifted. The CAPS indicator will appear on the screen to tell you that the
caps function is activated. To release the caps function, press (CAPS) again.
• If you press L IFT) while the CAPS indicator is displayed, this indicator is
temporarily replaced with the SHIFT indicator.
To shift all character keys, press r0ODE + siiiFTLock ( (cows ). The SHIFT indicator
is displayed permanently, and all the characters you type are upper case. To
release the shift lock function, simply press SHIFT
Extra Characters
CODE
to.
The extra characters are those marked in green on your keyboard. To enter such
a character, hold down and press the character key.
1.0111100C1 31,V31:10
Superimposed Characters
CODE BS
(Permanent Backspace)
•
it is possible to create characters that are not available on the keyboard ("v", for
example) by superimposing two available characters.
1. Type the first character ("Y" in our example).
• Although you may enter the characters in either order, start with the one you
want to appear in the text area.
2. Press (Cott) + . The first character appears now in reversed color, and
the cursor moves next to the P BS indicator on the status line.
138

3. Type the second character ("=" in our example) on the status line. As soon
as the second character is typed, the cursor moves back to the text area and
you may resume normal typing.
• When you subsequently move the cursor to the first character (press C at
this point, for example), the second character re-appears next to the P BS
indicator.
• To delete superimposed characters, simply delete the first character (useffg).
Accents ("Dead" Keys)

This organizer's multilingual keyboard supports the accented vowels of such lan-
guages as French, German, and Spanish. This feature is available with KB:l only.
If you have ever used a typewriter, you already know the basic procedure: Type
the accent and then the base character. Unlike regular keys, the accent keys
are "dead" -- that is, the cursor does not move afterward so the base character
appears under the accent. Make sure that the keyboard is set to KB:I, and try the
following example.
1. Type the accent "A". The accent appears next to the indicator DEAD. The
cursor is reversed and waits for a base character to be input. You are allowed
to input a maximum of two dead characters. If you make a mistake, press
to delete the dead character(s) and retype.
2. Type the letter "o". The letter with its accent "6" now appears in the text area.
• With some combinations of accents and base characters (such as Y and A),
the base character appears alone and in reverse color in the text area.
When you subsequently move the cursor to the base character, the accent
re-appears next to the DEAD indicator.
• To delete an accented character, proceed as you would for a normal character
(use 0).
In the next illustration, dead characters are indicated with a small grey box.
SPELL I INTCH I UNE I M REL I L MAR I R MAR T SET I DT SET I T CLR MORO OUT UNE OUT
CREATE DOCUMENT
BS
° FE
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 •
TAB O w E R T U O p
P NO TEMP INSERT JUST PRINT RETURN
CAPS .
A S b F G H J K L . INO CLR
.
SHIFT LOCK ABBR CALC GOTO HELP LAYOUT KB LINO 7
SHIFT Z X C V B TN M e [ > 1 ? SHIF

\ § I 2 il CODE . /
COVE MENU CANCEL
4
FILE EXPR PRE S NEXT S RELOC
at=1. .==a
139

Revising Text -- Basic Functions
Moving the Text Cursor

To make a revision, you must first go to that part of the document. The text cursor
indicates your current position in the document. The cursor is moved across your
document using the cursor keys (E), J, a CD) alone or in combination with :CODE?.
You may also use the goto page function to jump to a specified page.
Cursor Keys ..,

4— t 4,
EXPR PRES NEXT S RELOC
Moving the cursor

Keys Function
Moves the' ursar one character to the left, up
to the left margin.
Moves the cursor one character to the right, up
to the right margin.
Elk.) Moves the cursor one line up, to the first line of
the document. The text is scrolled if the cursor
is on the first line of the screen.
Moves the cursor one line down, to the end of
the document. The text is scrolled if the cursor
is on the last editable line of the screen (the
second line from the bottom when no message
is displayed).
Moves the cursor to the left margin.
QP Moves the cursor to the end of the current line
but does not jump past a symbol that signals
the end of a paragraph ("4", " wi ", and " >E ").
1N3N1000 31V380
( (19 ) Moves the cursor one full screen up (minus an

overlap of one line), to the beginning of the
document.
(SE)) Moves the cursor one full screen down (minus
an overlap of one line), to the end of the
document.
140

GOTO Page CODE G.
GO TO
The goto page function allows you to move the cursor immediately to the beginning
of any page of the document with a single operation.
1. Press CODE', + GO ( 1D ). The machine asks you to type in the number
of the page you wish to move the cursor to.
PAGE:1
2. Type the desired page number, then press c ULM) to move the cursor to
that page.
• If you have mistakenly entered an incorrect page number, you may change it
using resi, and you may cancel the operation with t CANCEL
• If you enter a page number that is higher than the number of the last page,
the cursor will jump to the last page.
• Instead of typing a page number, you may press one of the cursor keys just
after pressing coDE) f (`Go To 1 ( ):
Goto page
Keys Function
1+ 430-*) + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the
document.
Nolo: + Moves the cursor to the end of the document.
:CODE Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current
page; moves to the beginning of the previous
page when the cursor is at the beginning of the
current page.
+ + (i) Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next
page.
Inserting Text CODE
INSERT
Pressing +C I ( CD ) switches between insert and overwrite modes, and

turns the INS indicator on and off accordingly.
In overwrite mode (indicator INS off), each character you type replaces the current
character. You type over the existing data and your new data replaces the old data.
141

In insert mode (indicator INS on), the characters you type appear in front of the
cursor, the rest of the line automatically moves to the right and, if necessary, the
last word moves to the next line.
• Since deleting unnecessary characters is usually easier than retyping char-
acters that have been deleted, it's a goodidea to be in the insert mode before
you start revising.
Deleting a Character BS
Press 18 to delete one character to the left of the cursor.

This key also deletes paragraph end symbols " «a ", "NJ ", and " f " except
when these symbols are located just before a format symbol " E "or a cen-
tering symbol "H ".
Deleting a Word IWORDOUT

CODE t
0
To delete a word, position the cursor on the space immediately following the word
and press f J + WORD OUT ( CD ). This removes any portion of a word to the
left of the cursor, up to the previous blank space.
You will want to use this feature when you mistype a word in such a way that
deleting it and typing it over is faster than otherwise correcting it.
LINEOUT
Deleting a Line CODE
To delete a line, position the cursor anywhere after the last character of the line
and press (cam) + ( UNE OUT) ( CD ). Pressing IcODE- + LINE ouT removes any
1N3V11100C1 31,t9EIO
portion of a line to the left of the cursor, up to the beginning of the line.
142

Formatting Text -- Basic Functions
Format Change Symbol

The dead column of the text area (column 0) is reserved for the format change
symbol " ". Each time you change the format, -- that is, the left or right margin,
tab stops, justification, etc. -- this symbol appears in the dead column at the
beginning of the paragraph, and the text automatically adjusts to fit the new setting.
These new settings affect not only the current paragraph, but also all subsequent
text up to the next format change symbol. The text above the symbol remains
unchanged.
To return to a previous format setting, you may delete the format symbol in the
dead column.
1. Move to the first character of the line where the format takes effect.
2. Press [MEW to recall the function menu.
3. Move the cursor to BLOCK and press I RETURN I
4. Select DELETE and press I RETURN
5. Press CT) to highlight the format change symbol is and press RETURN,
6. Press (RETURN again to confirm the deletion. The text will confirm to the
previous format.
L MAR
Left and Right Margins CODE
4
R MAR
CODE
5
REL
CODE
3
The left and right margins are set to columns 10 and 75 respectively for a *NEWFILE.
Margins can be relocated at any time, before, during, or after typing the text.
1. Move the cursor to the new position for the left or right margin while observing
the scale. (See "Moving the Text Cursor" on page 140.) If the new position
is beyond the current margins, press (Dom' + REL.) (i ) when the cursor
is on the margin to allow the cursor to move freely.
2. Press ..,.=e0DE-, + MAR ) ) to set the new left margin, or CODE) + R MAR
( Ei ) to set the new right margin. The L or R symbol on the scale will move
accordingly.
143

• If you mistakenly press (M RE ) when there is no need to modify
the margins, press CANCEL to resume normal editing.
The minimum distance between margins is set to two inches. The maximum dis-
tance is nine inches. Remember, however, that the length of a printed line must
be smaller than the paper width, and that this length also depends on the selected
pitch.
Setting the Pitch PITCH
CODE
1
The pitch can be set to 10 (Pica, 10 characters per inch), 12 (Elite, 12 characters
per inch), or 15 (Micron, 15 characters per inch).
1. Move the cursor to the position where you want to change the pitch.
2. Press (coDE) + IPITCH) (D ) to change the pitch through the cycle 10, 12, 15.
As soon as you press com), the PITCH indicator appears. A format
symbol " € " appears in the dead column.
Changing the Line Spacing S ft

LINE
CODE
The line spacing can be set to to (6 lines per inch), 1.5 (4 lines per inch), or 2.0 (3
lines per inch).
1. Move the cursor to the position where you want to change the line spacing.
2. Press ittim) + ( C ) to change the line spacing through the cycle 1.0,
1.5, 2.0. As soon as you press (a:0E , the L.SPACE indicator appears. A format
symbol " " appears in the dead column.
Tabs and Decimal Tabs

1N3011100CI 31V380
If you have been using a typewriter, you already know how convenient tabs are for
aligning text. Decimal tabs provide additional convenience when typing numbers.
Decimal tabs automatically align a column of numbers at the decimal point instead
of the first character. The scale indicates these two types of tabs with T for normal
tabs, and o for decimal tabs.
144

Setting Tabs TSET
CODE
1 J7
DT SET
fi ti •
CODE
You may change tab stops at any time -- before, while, or after typing the text.
1. Move the cursor to the position where you want a tab. (See "Moving the Text
Cursor" on page 140.)
2. Press (cot* + T SET; ( C ) to seta normal tab stop, or (CODE .4- DT SET ( )
to set a decimal tab stop at the current cursor position. The corresponding
symbol T or o appears on the scale. Up to 30 tab and decimal tab stops can
be set. Setting a tab stop where you already had a decimal tab stop replaces
the D with a T and vice-versa.
• When you start with a *NEWFILE, there are no tab stops set.
• Since thepitch determines the actualposition on theprintedpage, the columns
may appear at undesired positions if you change the pitch of a table formatted
with tabs and decimal tabs.
Clearing Tabs T CLR

a.
CODE
t).
1. To clear a single tab or decimal tab, move the cursor to that position and press
(cope (rct.:R- ( 1:9-2
2. To clear all tabs and decimal tabs, hold down (CODE) + T CLR ) until the
All tabs cleared.
Using Tabs while Typing • TAB
P IND
1. Press (TAB) to move the cursor to the next tab stop to the right. A
symbol " -44 " appears on the screen just before the new text cursor position to
remind you that there is now a tab in the text.
• If there is no tab stop to the right, the cursor moves to the right margin.
2. Type your text.
3. Repeat the above procedure for each column in your table.
145

Using Decimal Tabs while Typing TAB
PINS
Decimal tab stops are a very convenient feature. When you move the cursor there
with (TAB;, the cursor remains fixed in that column, and each character that you type
appears to the left of the tab stop. Once you type the decimal point, however, the
point appears at the tab stop, and the cursor returns to normal operation. The
primary use, of course, is to align columns of numbers with decimal points.
1. Press (TAB to move the cursor to the next decimal tab stop to the right. A
symbol " " appears on the screen just before the new text cursor position to
remind you that there is now a tab in the text.
• If there is no tab stop to the right, the cursor moves to the right margin.
2. Type the number.
3. Repeat the above procedure for each column in your table.
The cursor also returns to normal operation if you press (RETURN or JAB)
Inserting Tabs CODE
INSERT
•
TAB
P IND
As always, you may type your number or text first and align the columns with tabs
and decimal tabs later.
1. If the INS indicator is off, press 555 E + INSERT ( CD ) to switch to the insert
mode.
If the insert mode is not on, "TAB) will just move to the next tab stop without
aligning the text.
2. Position the cursor on the beginning of the word that you want to align.
3. Press TAB). The text adjusts to fit the margins and page length.
1N3ICI000 31V980
Removing Tabs BS
If you change your mind, you may also remove a tab or decimal tab in order to undo
a table.
1. Position the cursor just after the tab symbol " -oi " on the screen.
2. Press ( . The text adjusts to fit the margins and page length.
146

Line Indent CODE
1'
Pressing (cow', I.1141) ( 0 ) iS the same as typing five spaces. The primary
application is indenting the first line of a paragraph.
• If the insert mode is not on, these five spaces overwrite the five characters at
the cursor location.
Paragraph Indent
The paragraph indent function may be considered as a temporary left margin.
Setting the Temporary Left Margin CODE TAB
PIND
There may be a time that you will need to indent text from the left margin. The
paragraph indent feature indents text to a tab stop. When the indent is released,
the cursor returns to the original left margin.
1 Set the tabs you will need for any of the indented paragraphs. (See "Setting
Tabs" on page 145.)
If your document has multiple levels ofparagraph indentation, itis a goodidea
to set all the tabs together at one point near the beginning.
2. If you have text, such as a section number, that you wish outside the indented
block, type that data.
3. Press itApj ) as many times as necessary to move the cursor
to the tab setting you want to be the new temporary margin. A " " symbol
is displayed just before the new cursor position to remind you that the following
text is indented.
• Ifyou changeyour mind, use to remove the paragraph indent symbol " ".
Using a Temporary Left Margin

As mentioned, the procedure is simple. Type the text of the paragraph. If you
press or type a space or hyphen in the hot zone, the cursor returns to the
paragraph indent position on the next line, and not to the left margin.
147

Returning to the True Left Margin
RETURN
•
CODE
IND CLR
At the end of the indented paragraph, simply press LSE) + ( RETURN

to return to the original left margin. The end of the indented paragraph is marked
with a " NJ " symbol to indicate that the paragraph indent mode has been exited.
• You are able to indent a paragraph after it has been typed. Position the cursor
on the first character of the paragraph to be indented andpress CODE) FIND
( TABJ ) to reposition it at the tab position. At the end of the indented block,
press (CODE + ( IND CLEAR-) ( RETURN ) to return to the original left margin.
Automatic Justification
The justify function adjusts the spacing between words so that every complete line
of text is aligned with both left and right margins.
Entering Justified Text

CODE 0
JUST
J •
1. Press (coDE) (AysT) ( C5) ) to turn the JST indicator on and start typing.
2. When you type a space or a hyphen in the hot zone, the cursor moves to the
next line and the current line is justified.
3. To resume normal typing, press (cam) JUST) ( ) again to turn the JST
indicator off.
Justifying Existing Text CODE 0

JUST
INNI11300 31V3110
1. Position the cursor at the first paragraph that you want to justify.
2. Press COPE) Just) ( 0 ) to turn the JST indicator on. An " E " symbol
appears in the dead column of the first line of the paragraph and the text is
automatically justified from this line down to the next " " symbol (if any exists)
or down to the end of the document. If your document contains
many " " symbols you will need to repeat these steps in order to justify the
whole text.
148

Page Layout View Function CODE J
LAYOUT
•
The page layout view function displays six pages at a time on the screen. To do
this, the text is scaled down so that a character is reduced to a dot on the screen.
You will, of course, not be able to read the text displayed that way, but you will have
a general view of the layout.
1. Position the cursor on the page that you want to preview.
2. Press (cope ‘,LAYOUT I ( Q ).
Six pages of your document are displayed simultaneously on the screen in
reduced scale. The number of each page appears in normal scale at the
upper-left corner of each page (the number of the page that was displayed on
the INPUT/EDIT screen appears in reverse color). For example, if page 8
was displayed on the INPUT/EDIT screen, pages 7 to 12 will now be displayed,
and the cursor will be on page 8.
« LAYOUT >> 7 9 REMAIN

XX.XK
TOP MARGIN 6
HEADER 0
TOP SPACE 0
TEXT AREA 54
BOTTOM SPACE 0 10 11 12
FOOTER 0
BOTTOM MARGIN 6
Press D
to show
-COLUMN
-NORMAL
3. Use the cursor keys Eie, 0, E, and g) to move the cursor. The cursor keys
will scroll the screen window by steps of six pages when you try to move the
cursor past the current window.
4. To return to the INPUT/EDIT screen, press RN , ComicEC1, or
LAYOUT") ( 0 ). The page which was selected in the preview screen appears
now in the normal display. This feature is very convenient when you spot
some layout defect in the preview screen. You may select that page number
and immediately switch to the normal display to correct the defective format.
• The text is first displayed according to the setting of the DOUBLE COLUMNS
PRINTING option on the PRINT MENU screen (see "Printing a File in
Memory" onpage 195). A single column is displayedif the option is set to NO,
or two columns per page if the option is set to YES. You may press 0 to
switch from one display mode to the other.
149

Adding Effects (STYLE)
The effects provided by the STYLE option on the function menu allow you to enhance
the appearance of your document. They include bold characters, underlining,
automatic insertion of blanks (expand), as well as subscripts and superscripts.
Bold Face Characters CODE
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

BOLD „ .VET , (ON)
UNDERLINE OFF t (CNT) (WRD)
""EXPAND OFF (ON)
;- ' SUPER SUB ON/OFF OFF IV. (SUPER) (SUB)
If you want to turn the bold function on before typing, skip this step. If you
want to change the type face of a portion of text already typed, position the
cursor at the beginning of that portion.
2. Press (hIENti1 to display the menu.
3. Use E and l+r) to select STYLE, and press ("EuRN or 0.
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "S".
4. Use (1 and EC to select BOLD.
5. Use :(SPACEBARi- to turn the bold function ON.
Accelerator: Instead of (4) and (5), you may type "B".
6. Press t K IN . The BLD indicator is now on.
Short cut: instead of (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), you may press (CODE l + CD to
switch the bold function ON/OFF.
7. The text you now type or the text you scan by moving the cursor right/down
is displayed in bold. If you move the cursor past the desired position, simply
INN1f1000 31V380
move back to unmark. To move the cursor one line at a time, use Ei) and CD.
8. To return to normal typing, repeat steps (2), (3), (4), (5) and (6) to turn the
bold function OFF, or press COE +
• To undo bold characters, position the cursor just after the last bold character,
turn the bold function ON, and move the cursor left/up. Turn the bold function
OFF to stop undoing bold.
150

Underlining CODE
J.
-STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABSR/TAR SEARCH FORM PAGE

-BOLD OFF (ON)
{CNT) {WED)
EXPAND OFF {ON)
SUPER SUB ON/OFF OFF {SUPER) (SUB)
If you want to turn the underline function on before typing, skip this step. If
you want to underline a portion of text already typed, position the cursor at
the beginning of that portion.
2. PressMENU') to display the menu.
3. Use E and CJ to select STYLE, and press 1RETuRN or J.
4. Use 0 and E to select UNDERLINE.
'5. Use ( (sPAcEBAR) ) to select CNT (continuous underlining) or WRD (word
underlining).
• Accelerator: Instead of (4) and (5), you may type "N".
6. Press FAE1 NRD. The corresponding indicator is now on.
-1J---
Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), you may press (CODE! ÷ 0 to
switch the underline function CNT/WRD/OFF.
If you select continuous underlining, all will be underlined, including blank
spaces. With word underlining, blank spaces are not underlined.
7. The text you now type or the text you scan by moving the cursor right/down
is underlined. If you move the cursor past the desired position, simply move
back to remove the underline. To move the cursor one line at a time, use 0
and E.
underline function off, or press LODE + (14j.
To undo underlining, position the cursor just after the last underlined character,
select CNT or WRD, and move the cursor left/up. Turn the underline function
OFF to stop removing underlining.
151

Typing Expanded Text
'STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

BOLD OFF r (ON)
UNDERLINE OFF (CNT) (WRD)
AXPAND. :. OFF,-
(ON)
SUPER SUB ON/OFF CFF (SUPER) (SUB)
The expand function is used only while typing. You cannot use it to reformat text
that has been typed.
(MENU)
1. Press to display the menu.
2. Use and CD to select STYLE, and press MI
-RE RN or 1.
3. Use Q and to select EXPAND.
4. Use ( (SPACEBAR) to turn the function ON.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) and (4), you may type "E".
5. Press (Fterunt41. The EXP indicator is now on.
6. The text you now type is expanded -- that is, a permanent space is auto-
matically inserted after each text character.
expand function off.
• The permanent spaces inserted with the expand function cannot be removed
automatically. To undo the expand format, delete the permanent spaces one
by one using M.
Subscripts and Superscripts CODE
1
1N31111000 31V380
CODE
AnYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

BOLD OFF . .f (ON)
'UNDERLINE OFF . (CNT) (WRD)
k EXPAND . OFF (ON)
r; i3PEFE1M&BHONt0Ert. .14DFP , (SUPER) (SUB)
You are able to enter and print subscripts and superscripts.
152

Characters in subscript and superscript are displayed on the same line as
normal characters. When you input a subscript or superscript or move the
cursor to a subscript or superscript, however, only a half of the cursor appears
(lower-half for subscripts, and upper-half for superscripts).
• With a Brother daisy wheel printer, the subscripts and superscripts print the
same distance (1/12 inch) below or above the line, regardless of the current
line spacing.
1. Move the cursor to the position where you want to type a superscript (or
subscript).
2. Press mENui to display the menu.
3. Use and O to select STYLE, and press LAMM or
4. Use e and G to select SUPER sue ON/OFF.
5. Use ftSpACE BABY: to select SUPER or SUB.
6. Press . If the superscript mode is activated, only the upper half of
the cursor will be displayed. The lower half will be displayed if the subscript
mode is activated.
7. To return to normal typing, repeat steps (2), (3), (4), and (5) to switch the
function OFF.
• To undo superscripts or subscripts, turn the function OFF and retype the
characters.
• Short cut: Instead of the above procedure, you may use + ID and
(kM) +
Example: Try to enter "e=mc2".

1. Type "e=mc".
2. Press IL-M) +
3. Type "2".
4. Press igM) +
• To enter subscripts, proceedin the same way as above, but reverse the
+ and keys.
• Each pair of keys ( C) and ) cancels the other, and the
two pairs must always be used in combination. If you try to press one of the
pairs more than once, the machine beeps.
153

Centering and Right Margin Flush
(CTR/RMF)
The centering function is used to center a line as characters are typed or to center
a line that was previously typed. You may center text either between margins or
tab stops.
The right margin flush mode is used to have a line automatically adjusted to end
exactly on the right margin. Many people like to date their letters this way.
Centering Between Margins CODE F
STYLE BLOCK OTIWRMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

VENTERIfiG -
1,tRIGHT MARGIN FLUSH 1,
When you center between margins, the position of the cursor in the line does not
matter.
2. Use E and 11 to select CTR/RMF, and press Lpu a_3 or J.
3. Use E and Cm ii to select CENTERING and press E SRN . The cursor moves
to the center point between your margins. The symbol of centering between
margins " H " appears on the line. If the text has already been typed, it is
automatically centered and you may skip step (4).
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "C".
Short cut: instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press ( D÷
llonooa 311380
4. Type the text.

5. Press LFIETURN to finish the centering operation.
Centering Between Tabs CODE
4,1
STYLE BLOCK SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE
RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH4,,
154

1. Press (TAB, as many times as necessary to reach the desired tab position (the
position that will become the left end of the centering range).
2. Press (MENU 1 to display the menu.
3. Use E. and EI to select CTR/RMF, and press ( RETURN or J.
4. Use tf'.j and &- to select CENTERING and press RETURN . The cursor moves
to the center point between the tab position where the cursor was in (1) and
the next tab to the right -- or the right margin if there are no more tabs set. A
centering symbol " PI " appears on the line. If the text has already been typed,
it is automatically centered and you may skip step (5).
Accelerator: instead of (4), you may type "C".
Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press (00DC + F.J.
5. Type the text.
6. Press to finish the centering operation, or 1 ►s1 to move to the next
tab.
Centering between a tab and the right margin is possible, but not between the
left margin and a tab.
Centering between a tab and a decimal tab is not possible.
Undoing Centering
While you are still in centering mode, press to exit the mode (you may
also select CENTERING from the menu, or press + El). To bring a centered
text back flush with the left limit of the centering range, position the cursor just after
the centering symbol " H " or " Fl " and press OD to delete the symbol.
Right Margin Flush CODE

fi
STYLE BLOCK CTRIRNW SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

CENTERING
RIGHt.:14MIGIM 1TOSIt
If the text to be aligned flush with the right margin has not been typed yet, skip
this step. If you want to align text that has been already typed, position the
cursor on the first character of that text. If you want to align the whole line,
for example, position the cursor on the first characters of the line.
2. Press WrVi to display the menu.
3. Use FE and C3 to select CTR/RMF, and press or J.
155

4. Use EC and E to select RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH and press (RETURN . The cursor
moves to the right margin. A right margin flush symbol " H " appears on the
line. if the text has already been typed, it is automatically aligned flush with
the right margin (any blank space at the end of the shifted line will be cut off)
and you may skip step (5).
• Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "R".
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may press =C DE + D.
5. Type the text. The cursor will not move, but the text that you type is scrolled
to the left.
6. Press CREMRN, to finish the right margin flush operation and bring the cursor
to the beginning of the next line.
Undoing a Right Margin Flush Format

While you are still in right margin flush mode, press ( oatisce.-.1 to exit the mode (you
may also select RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH from the menu, or press Cam) + D). To
undo an existing right margin flush format, simply delete the right margin flush
symbol " H " using
1N31111000 31V3d0
156

A block can be copied, deleted, or moved to another part of the same document.
A block can also be copied into an entirely different document.
Copying a Block within the es.

CODE
•
C
Document

COPY
..;DELETE
MOVE
1. Position the cursor on the first character of the block you want to copy.
2. Press (MENU to display the menu.
3. Use E- and ) to select BLOCK, and press (mum') or a
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "B".
4. Use CD and CD to select COPY and press RETURN:
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3) and (4), you may press (cooEj (e).
Move cursor to block end. Press RETURN or to store temporary file press TEMP.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the block to be copied. As you move the cursor,
the block is marked (reverse image). You may move the cursor back toward
the beginning of the block to unmark. All key combinations used to move the
text cursor can be used when marking a block (See "Moving the Text
6. When the block to be copied is marked, press liftETUFUC
7. Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the marked block
and press RETURN The marked block is automatically copied to that position
and the document is reformatted to conform to the modified sections of the
document. (See "Formatting Text -- Basic Functions" on page 143.)
• The block is inserted regardless of the current mode (insert or overwrite). This
means that the block will never overwrite text at the destination position.
157

• Press ICANcel:i at any step to cancel the function.
• Since the block copy operation increases the size of your document, it might
happen that you run out of memory. When this happens, the copy operation
is cancelled and the following message appears:
Not enough memory remaining.
You must either first delete a portion of the document to free some space, or
try to copy only a smaller block.
Copying a Block into CODE C

a Different File
CODE T
TEMP
STYLE !atocx CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE
DELETE
MOVE
A portion of the memory is reserved for a temporary file in which you may copy a
block of the current document. Later, the contents of the temporary file can be
recalled for insertion in the same document or in any other document you are
working on. This means that the temporary file can be used to copy a block of text
from one file into another file.
You may copy a block stored in the temporary file as many times as you want.
Each time you store a new block in the temporary file, you will erase the previous
contents of the temporary file.
On the other hand, you can recall the contents of the temporary file as many times
IND11000 311880
as you want without altering it.

• The temporary file is erased after the power is turned off.
• The temporary file may contain up to 3.5K bytes (about 3,500 characters).
1. Position the cursor on the first character of the block you want to copy.
3. Use CD and CD to select BLOCK, and press , or 0.
4. Use 0 and 0 to select COPY and press RETURN I
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3) and (4), you may press CODE
158

Move cursor tc 21OCK end. Press RETURN or tc store temporary file press TEMP.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the block to be copied. As you move the cursor,
the block is marked (reverse image).
6. When the block is marked, press (coDE1 ("r9AP ( OO to store the file in
)
temporary memory (DO NOT press ( RETURN ). The marked block is now stored
as a temporary file.
• Press CANCEL J at any step to cancel the function.
Recalling the Temporary File 'sr

CODE T
TEMP
The contents of the temporary file can be recalled and inserted into any file you are
working on.
1. Position the cursor on the location where you want to insert the contents of
the temporary file.
2. Press CODE + (TEMP ( O ). The following message appears:
You can recall temporary file. To recall temporary file press RETURN.
3. Press ( RETURN,. The text stored into the temporary file will now be inserted
into the document at the cursor position.
Deleting a Block CODE

COPY
DELETE
MOVE
1. Position the cursor on the first character of the block you want to delete.
3. Use l and 0 to select BLOCK, and press RETURN or D.
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "B".
4. Use 0 and 0 to select DELETE and press RETURN )
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3) and (4), you may press (:CODE 4- (T.)J.
159

Move cursor to end of block to delete and press RETURN.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the block to be deleted. As you move the cursor,
the beginning of the block to unmark. AN key combinations used to move the
6. When the block to be deleted is marked, press RETURN ]. The machine asks
for confirmation:
1 Deiete? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no) .
7. If you press :1411,1T3I, the block (displayed in reverse image) is deleted, and
any text following the block is reformatted to conform to commands in force
for that section of the document. (See "Formatting Text -- Basic Functions" on
page 143.)
Moving a Block CODE
STYLE 'BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

COPY
DELETE
'ittNA
1. Position the cursor on the first character of the block you want to move.
2. Press ',MENU to display the menu.
3. Use Cip and 0 to select BLOCK, and press ( RETURN' or CD.
Aninooa 31V380
4. Use 0 and CD to select MOVE and press CRETURNr3

• Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "E".
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3) and (4), you may press towel +
Move cursor to end of block to move and press RETURN.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the block to be moved. As you move the cursor,
160

the beginning of the block to unmark. All key combinations used to move the
6. When the block to be moved is marked, press RETURN )
7. Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the marked block
and press RETURN]. The marked block is automatically transferred to that
position and the document is reformatted to conform to the modified sections
of the document. (See "Formatting Text -- Basic Functions" on page 143.)
• The block is inserted regardless of the current mode (insert or overwrite). This
means that the block will never overwrite text at the destination position.
• Press CANCEL at any step to cancel the function.
CREATE DOCUMENT
161

Searching for Text (SEARCH)
In addition to using the cursor keys to move throughout your text, you may find any
position in your file quickly by using the search function.
You may automatically scan the document for all occurrences of a specific piece
of text (called a "string") and, at your option, replace all or some of those occurrences
with another string. (See "Search and Replace" on page 164.)
A string may be up to 63 characters long, and may include "dead" and superim-
posed characters. (See "Defining a String" on page 163.)
Search
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR. SEARCH FORM PAGE

SEARCH
REPLACE
HYPHEN SCAN
This function scans the text from the current text cursor position and pauses when
the string is found, waiting for you to tell it whether to stop there or proceed to the
next occurrence.
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the section that you wish to scan. If
you want to scan the entire document, for example, move the cursor to the
beginning of the text.
2. Press (MENU, to display the menu.
3. Use CD and CD to select SEARCH, and press RETURN) or 0,
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "R".
4. Use Ci and 0 to select SEARCH and press ( RETURN
Short cut: There is no short-cut key for this function.
iNmnooa EV380
Type .search words). Press RETURN to start search.

ISEARCH A
5. Enter the text you are looking for and press RETURN
6. When the first occurrence is found, the following prompt will appear:
162

7. If this is the place you are looking for, press and do the necessary
editing. If you wish to proceed to the next occurrence, press I RETURFil to
continue the search.
• When there are no more occurrences, the following message appears, and
will automatically disappear when you press a key.
Word (s) not found.
8. Resume normal operation or go back to step (1) to search for another string
-- or for the same string again. Since the search string remains in memory
until you define another or turn the power off, you will not have to re-enter it
in step (5) when you search repeatedly for the same string, and exit to make
changes.
Defining a String
The 63-character limit refers to the number of characters you see on the
screen. An accented character (made with a dead key) or superimposed
characters (made with a permanent backspace) count as a single character
even if it takes two or more keystrokes to type.
The search function distinguishes between upper and lower case letters. For
example, if you specify 'ALPHA', it will not stop at "alpha" or 'Alpha".
Each space that you type (with ((SPACE BAR) I ) in the string counts as one
character.
• The string input area initially appears as a continuous underline. Everything
before the trailing underline is consideredpart of the string. The string shown
below, for example, is five characters long because it ends with two spaces.
ype .teardh word(S).'. Press RETURN o start -search.

'SEARCH :AAA 1
• The search function stops at every string that matches the specified string --
even if the match is inside a word. If the specified string is "at", it stops
CREATE DOCUMENT
at "at" of "hat", "attention", etc. If you wish to search only for the word "at",
specify "at ", leaving a space on each side of the word.
• The search function ignores "soft spaces" thatare addedby the justify function
and hyphens other than permanent ones.
The search string cannot contain attributes such as bold, underline, subscript,
or superscripts because the search function ignores them. Ifyou specify "A2",
it stops at "A2", "A,", "A2" -- and all combinations with bold and underline as
well.
163

• Pressing [CANCEL during string input deactivates the search function, but the
string remains in memory until you define another, or turn the power off.
Search and Replace
STYLE BLOCH CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH F2:RE PAGE

SEARCH
REPLACE
SYPHEI: SCAN
The search and replace function is just the search function with the option of rep-
lacing some or all occurrences with another text string.
The system automatically reformats your document if the replacement is not the
same length as the original.
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the section that you wish to scan. If
you want to scan the entire document, for example, move the cursor to the
beginning of the text.
2. Press (MENU' to display the menu.
3. Use K- and E to select SEARCH, and press ( RETURN) or C.
4. Use tj and Li to select REPLACE and press (`RETURN 3.
. . warowft 714ress -IvIr&Flile&E, RETORN to start :search.

Type -:searaharid..replace
SEARCH Ai
REPLACE:
5. Enter both the text that you wish to look for and the replacement. Use Ci and
to shift between the two input areas and press RETURN when input is
INNIf1000 31V380
completed.
Global? Press RETURN(yes) or TAB(no).
6. If you press ( RETURN , all occurrences from the cursor position to the end of
the document will be automatically replaced. When the function has been
completed, the cursor will move to the end of the file and return to the normal
edit mode. To stop the function in progress, press [CANCEL
If you press (ms), it will stop at the first occurrence and this message will
appear:
164

Press RETURN to replace word(s), TAB not to replace word(s),
CANCEL tc
7. To replace this occurrence, press (RETURN, . The system carries out the
change, then stops at the next occurrence and displays the above message
again.
To search for the next occurrence without replacing, press trAIC. The system
stops at the next occurrence and displays the above message again.
To stop searching and return to the normal edit mode, press ( CANCEL,. If you
mistakenly press this key, you may re-start from step (1). Since the search
and replace strings remain in memory until you define others, you will not have
to re-enter them in step (5).
• When there are no more occurrences, the following message appears, and
will automatically disappear when you press a key.
Word(s) not found.
• If you repeatedly replace strings with longer ones in a very long document,
you may run out of memory. In such a case, the function is cancelled and the
Memory full.
The message will remain until you delete some portion of the document to
free some memory space.
Hyphen Scan
CREATE DOCUMENT
SEARCH
REPLACE
IITPRZW-1SCAN-
A problem arises with the word wrap function when the distance between margins
is small, or when typing a text in languages like German using very long words.
Since the word wrap function automatically transfers a word that cannot lit in the
current line to the next line, excessively long blank spaces may appear, resulting
in a poor layout.
The hyphen scan function automatically detects such long blank spaces and gives
you a chance to hyphenate the long words. It allows you to type your text without
making any manual hyphenations (except, of course, a permanent hyphen).
165

1. After your text is typed, position the cursor at the beginning of the section that
you wish to scan. If you want to scan the entire document, for example, move
the cursor to the beginning of the text.
2. Press MENU to display the menu.
3. Use F, and O to select SEARCH, and press I RETURN or E.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "Fl".
4. Use TA and Q to select HYPHEN SCAN and press CRETURN
Accelerator: Instead of (4), you may type "H".
5. The hyphen scan function will scan your text down from the cursor position
and search for lines containing blank spaces longer than the six columns of
the hot zone. The long word that has been transferred to the next line by the
word wrap function is displayed in reverse color. The following message
appears:
Move cursor, press RETURN to hyphenate, TAB to continue, CANCEL to exit.
6. If you want to hyphenate this word, position the cursor at the most suitable
position and press t RETURN i. The word will be hyphenated and the portion of
the word to the left of the hyphen will be transferred to the previous line. The
hyphen scan function will search for the next occurrence of a long blank space.
If you want to skip this occurrence and keep the word without a hyphen, press
The whole word will be transferred to the next line, where it was originally,
and the hyphen scan function will search for the next occurrence of a long
blank space.
Press [ ELi if you want to terminate the hyphen scan function.
INNI11000 311g80
166

Spell Check System (SPELL)
SPELL is used for automatic detection of errors (Spell Checker) and includes the
tools you need to work with personal "user dictionaries". The Spell Checker can
be used in the "ALL" mode to check the entire document, or in the "ONE WORD" mode
to check the words while you are typing them.
Understanding the Spell Checker

The Spell Checker is a powerful tool for increasing your proofreading efficiency.
The Spell Checker comes with a built-in dictionary of about 70.000 English words.
When checking your text, the Spell Checker automatically compares each word
with the contents of the dictionary. If a word is not found in the dictionary, the
machine assumes that the word in question is misspelled and warns you.
The built-in dictionary contains only standard English words and will consider words
like brand names, people's names, or foreign language words as misspelled words,
even if those words are perfectly correct. If you are frequently using such words
in your document, you should create a "User Dictionary" and store those words in
that dictionary. The user dictionary is kept in the memory and you may save it on
disk. When a word cannot be found in the built-in dictionary, the Spell Checker will
scan the user dictionary and warn you only if the word cannot be found there.
When a word cannot be found in either dictionary, the Spell Checker gives you a
menu of options:
• You may IGNORE the warning and keep the suspect word unchanged.
• You may ask for SUGGESTIONS. In this case, the Spell Checker will supply
possible replacement word(s) for the suspect word.
• You may also directly RETYPE the word correctly. This option is used when
the error is evident and easy to correct, or when the system cannot provide
the correct suggestion.
• You may ADD the suspect word to the user dictionary. This is useful when the
suspect word, although correct, is not a standard English word. Once the
CREATE DOCUMENT
word is stored in the user dictionary, the Spell Checker will not warn you the
next time the same word is found.
The Spell Checker also detects redundant words (you typed the same word twice).
When this happens, a menu of options appears:
• You may IGNORE the warning and keep the repeated word in the text.
• You may automatically ERASE the SECOND WORD.
167

Important Notice
This system is not a replacement for careful proofreading of your documents. It
has no way of knowing, for example, whether words are missing or whether a given
word is appropriate for the current syntactic or semantic context. If you
type "teh" instead of "the", the spell checker alerts you because "teh" is not a valid
English word; but if you type "one" instead of "on", it does not consider it a mistake.
Checking Existing Text -- ALL

You may automatically scan the entire document for problems. The scan is uni-
directional -- that is, it starts at the word where the cursor is currently located and
works toward the end of the document.
Activating the System SPELL
CODE
STYLE BLOCK C TRJRMF IPE14 ABBR /THP SEARCH FORM PAGE

SPE1L .
USER DICTIONARY MAINTENANCEr
USER DICTIONARY LOAD
USER DICTIONARY SAVE
Position the cursor at the location of the document where you want to start
checking. For example, if you want to check the entire document, position
the cursor over the first word of the document.
2. Press [MENu ) to display the function menu.
3. Use J and 0 to select SPELL, then press or 1,fiETURN to display the sub-
menu.
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "L".
IN3W11000 31V3d0
•
4. Use E and 0 to select SPELL CHECK and press . The following menu
appears:
• ikrefilLIZTURN:.
ALL ONE WORD

Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), and (4), you may simply press [SPELL
168

5. Use and to select ALL and press (RETURN The Spell Checker starts
scanning your text for misspelled word and displays the message:
While Checking (Suspect & Redundant Words)

When a suspect or redundant word is found, the above message disappears and
is replaced with a menu of options. The suspect word or redundant word appears
in reverse color in the text.
Example 1: Let's suppose that you have typed "The quick broen fox..."
("broen" is suspect)
The quick broen fox...
Use cursor! to :select. 'T'rese:ft=1114N,

SUSPECT WORD: broen
WENU4 IGNORE SUGGESTION RETYPE ADD
Use J and J to select an option and press RETuRW.

1. If you select IGNORE: the system start searching for the next suspect word.
The word "broen" will not be corrected.
2. If you selected SUGGESTIONS: a menu of possible replacement words appears.
The quick broen fox...
Use cursortoselect,„i4P-teO FtETUAP,

SUSPECT WORD: broen
SUGGESTIONS : :brown broken brawn bruin brain brine borne boron
Use C) and E. to select the correct word and press (RETURN . The correct
word will automatically replace the wrong one in the text and the system starts
searching for the next suspect word. If the correct word does not appear in
the suggestion menu, simply press MCEI.
CA to return to the first menu and
select RETYPE as explained below.
3. If you select RETYPE: an input area appears so that you can type the correct
word:
169

The quick broen fox.
Type word and press RETURN.

SUSPECT WORC:: droer.
WORD: N
You may immediately type the correct word and press RETURN The retyped
word replaces the wrong one in the text and the system starts searching for
the next suspect word.
You may also press C first. This will display the suspect word in the input
area so that you can correct it in a few keystrokes. Press RETURN 3 when the
word is corrected.
4. If you select ADD: the suspect word is added to the user dictionary. From now
on, it will not be considered suspect any more. The following message
appears:
Word added to user dictionary.
Example 2: Let's now suppose that you have typed "The quick brown fox fox..."
(the second "fox" is redundant)
The quick brown torlft. . .

oft./
oftft/
(Use .'cursor. -select.. Press AVITRIL

REDUNDANT WORD: fox
lirMENU4 IGNORE ERASE SECOND WORD
Use and &D to select an option and press t RETURN j.

IN3III1000 3iV383
1. If you select IGNORE: the word is kept in the text and the system starts searching
for the next suspect or redundant word.
2. If you select ERASE SECOND WORD: the second word is deleted and the system
starts searching for the next suspect or redundant word.
The process repeats until the end of the document (a message will tell you that you
reached the end of the document) or until you press [CODE' + (SPELL or CANCEL s to
turn the Spell Check off.
170

Checking While Typing -- ONE WORD
The Spell Checker can be used to check each word as you type.
Activating the System

SPELL
CODE 0
Refer to "Activating the System" on page 168. The only differences between
the "One Word" procedure and the "All" procedure are: 1) you must first position
the cursor at the location where you are going to type, and 2) when the option
menu "ALL ONE WORD" appears, you must select ONE WORD. The Spell Checker
will be automatically activated.
Once the Spell Checker is activated, the SPELL indicator appears on the screen.
The words you type are checked for spelling error or redundancy. If an error is
found, the system interrupts your typing and displays a menu of options. See "While
Checking (Suspect & Redundant Words)" on page 169 for details.
• To disable the Spell Checker, press (tom Ms u. .
Understanding the User Dictionary

A user dictionary is created automatically when you select the ADD function to add
a word to the dictionary and will be kept in the memory as a separate file. The
memory can hold only one user dictionary file, but this file can be saved on a disk.
You can then delete the current user dictionary and start creating a new one. A
user dictionary file that is saved on a disk can be loaded back into the memory.
• You need to save the user dictionary on a disk before you run the Spreadsheet
program, the Disk Application program, or the Disk Copy function because
these operations make use of the whole memory and always clear its content.
Remember that the user dictionary will be deleted from the memory if you
remove the lithium battery while the power is off, or if the lithium battery
becomes flat.
• The memory of the machine can hold only one dictionary. If you create a
dictionary in the memory, and then loada dictionary from a disk, the dictionary
currently in the memory will be overwritten by the loaded dictionary.
• A disk can hold only one dictionary. If you save a dictionary on a disk that
already contains one, the new dictionary will automatically overwrite the old
one. Use different disks to save different user dictionaries.
• The capacity of the user dictionaty is limited to about 204 words of seven
characters.
171

User Dictionary Maintenance
STYLE BLOCY CTR/RMF - SPELL ABBR'THR SRARCH FORM PAGE

SPELL CHEC
USER. DICTIONARY MAINTENANCE
• USER DICTIONARY LOAL
USER DICTIONARY SAVE
Beside the ADD option that allows you to add a suspect word to the user dictionary,
the Spell Check system provides you with special tools for direct editing of the user
dictionary.
1. Press ,.MENU to display the function menu.
2. Use 1 and 1:3 to select SPELL, then press or ( RETURN to display the sub-
menu.
3. Use 1- and (4)
to select USER DICTIONARY MAINTENANCE and press RETURN ‘.
The following display appears.
<< USER DICTIONARY >> TOTAL WORDS:XXX IS SRP.7 10:24AM
hifistE. Benoit
Cathy Packard
WP XTY123
:.::type:.. oe z"PresbNENU foli_ahOrtaion4WWWFressjE to finish.

ADD: M
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "M".

• Short cut: There is no short-cut key for this operation.
4. To add a new word, type it and press ( RETURN J. The new word will be inserted
in the list in alphabetical order. The system will tell you if you try to input a
word that already exists in the user dictionary.
IN3M1000 314380
• On the User Dictionary screen, the keyboard is automatically set to KB:I.

5. To return to normal typing, press "cam) + t J ( (MENU) ).
172

Using the Function Menu for other Options
MENU
FILE
EXIT. DELETE ALL DELETE LOAD SAVE

,..
Alfred
Cathy Packard
WP XTY123
Select frommenu , and press -RETURN..
• To select a word, use C3, C], (cote + PRE s' ( Q ), or CODE) + NEXTS ( 0 ).
You may also press CODE ▪ 430 TO (0 ) to go closer to the word that you
want to select. A message will ask you to enter the first letter of the word:
Type letter to move cursor.
Type the letter.

1. From the USER DICTIONARY screen, press ME to display a menu of
functions:
To select a function from the menu, useE andE or type the letter displayed
in bold.
2. To exit the user dictionary maintenance screen, select EXIT and press
• Accelerator: To select EXIT from the menu, you may type "E".
• Short Cut: To exit without displaying the menu, you may press O +
( ).
3. To delete a word, first select the word from the user dictionary screen. Press
select DELETE and press tRETURNI. The following message appears:
Delete the word from user dictionary? Press RETURN (yes) or CANCEL (no).
Accelerator: To select DELETE from the menu, you may type "D".
• Short Cut: To enable the delete function without displaying the menu, you
tx E + cp.
may press (--3'D
Press to delete, or C§REKI to keep the word in the user dictionary.
4. To delete all words, select ALL DELETE and press rgMhiri. The following
message appears:
Delete all words in user dictionary? Press RETURN (yes) or CANCEL (no).
173

• Accelerator: To select ALL DELETE from the menu, you may type "A':
• Short Cut: There are no short-cut keys for this function.
Press ( RETURN i to delete, or ( CANCEL) to keep the user dictionary unchanged.
5. To load a different user dictionary file from a different disk, insert the disk in
the drive, select LOAD and press RETURN ). Remember that loading a user
dictionary file will overwrite the user dictionary currently in memory.
• Accelerator: To select LOAD from the menu, you may type "L".
• Short Cut: To enable the LOAD function without displaying the menu, you
may press 1 + M.
6. To save the user dictionary, insert a disk in the drive, select SAVE and press
(:;RETURN ) This message will appear:
Press RETURN to save.
Press E ETURN.3. Remember that saving the user dictionary onto a disk which
already contains a user dictionary file will overwrite that file on the disk.
• Accelerator: To select SAVE from the menu, you may type "S".
• Short Cut: To enable the SAVE function without displaying the menu, you
may press ( +
Loading a User Dictionary

The Spell Check system allows you to have several user dictionaries, but you cannot
store more than one on the same disk. This feature is very useful when you are
dealing with different kinds of documents. For example, if the documents you have
to create most frequently are letters (containing people's names) and sales reports
(containing company names) you may store these two kinds of documents on
different disks, and create the corresponding user dictionary on each disk.
• If you are using the Spell Checker for the first time, your disk does not contain
any user dictionary file and you will not be able to load anything..
INNIA000 31.V383
If you want to reuse an existing user dictionary, first insert the corresponding disk
in the disk drive.
v,
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF a1 ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE
SPELL CHECK
USER DICTIONARY MAINTENANCE
' 'Wait tiVrION,Mir%61413 - -
e. USER DICTIONARY SAVE
. Press LMENW to display the function menu.
174

2. Use F- and CD to select SPELL, then press Ti or Arru to display the sub-
menu.
3. Use E.0,) and R, to select USER DICTIONARY LOAD and press ( RETURN- . The user
dictionary is now in the machine memory.
Saving the User Dictionary

When you save a user dictionary file on a disk that already contains a user dictionary,
the current contents of the user dictionary in memory will replace the user dictionary
file on the disk.
STYLE B LOCK C TR/RMF :SPELL , ABBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

: SPELL CHECK
,t
r. : USER DICTIONARY MAINTENANCE
USER DICTIONARY LOAD
IISEK.-.1.1ctibkARY.slivr7:7"
Press MENU1 to display the function menu.

2. Use E1- and r to select SPELL, then press CD or to display the sub-
menu.
Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "L".
3. Use E and CD to select USER DICTIONARY SAVE and press (RETURN, . This

4. Press CRETUFtN to save the user dictionary on the disk.
175

Abbreviated Phrases and Thesaurus
(ABBR/THR)
ABBR/THR is used to improve the style of your documents and your typing speed.
It includes two thesaurus functions, the EDIT THESAURUS which provides syn-
onyms for a word already typed, and the TYPE THESAURUS which will provide
synonyms for a word that you specify. ABBR/THR also includes functions that allow
you to create and retrieve "phrases" -- that is, combinations of words often used in
your documents. Once created, these phrases can be quickly inserted in your
documents by simply typing a short abbreviation.
Thesaurus
The Thesaurus is a useful feature that allows you to search for synonyms for the
word you specify, and replace the selected word with a synonym if you desire. The
Thesaurus contains 45,000 words.
There are two ways to enter the Thesaurus mode: EDIT THESAURUS gives
synonyms for the word the cursor is on, while TYPE THESAURUS waits until you
type a word and then gives a list of synonyms for that word.
Edit Thesaurus
STYLE BLOCK C TR / RMF SPELL AlltialllikSEARCH FORM PAGE

ABBREVIATED PHRASE MAINTENANCE
ABBREVIATED PHRASE LOAD
ABBREVIATED PHRASE SAVE
EDIT THESAURUS.
TYPE THESAURUS
Position the cursor on the word that you want to replace with a synonym. (Let's
assume that the word the cursor is on is "still".)
10111000 31V380
2. Press imENli) to display the function menu.

3. Use 0 and CD to select ABBR/THR and press CD or RETURN to display the
sub-menu.
4. Use 0 and C) to select EDIT THESAURUS and press RETURN
5. After a while, the following menu appears:
176

*tin
Use cursor to selecL Riess RETURN.
SPECIFIED WORD: still
IPTHESAURUS 4 NOUNA1.) VERB (2) ADJ. (4) ADV. (4)
• This menu means that the system found synonyms for the word "still" in four
syntactic categories (nouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs). The same
categories will, of course, not necessarily be displayed with any specified word.
The number at the right of each category indicates the number of semantic
classes into which that category is subdivided. For instance, VERB(2) means
that you will find two lists of verbs that are synonyms of the word "still". By
definition, synonyms are words with (almost) the same meaning. You will find,
however, that words belonging to the same semantic class are closer to each
other than words from different semantic classes in the same syntactic
category.
• If there is no synonym for the specified word, the following message appears:
Synonym not found.
6. Use 0 and 0 to select the category and press CAE-rum' . You may also press
(` CANCEL to exit the function. Let's assume that you selected VERB(2). The
following menu appears:
still
POecursor.'toHseyzdti;. RTOSVOIWON.
VERB1 : silence quiet shut up hush shush
7. Use @ and C:D to select a word. If the complete list cannot fit in the display,
the same keys will scroll the list. If there are more than one semantic class,
use CD and 0 to display the other classes.

VERB2 : 'Settle compose calm soothe quiet lull allay
177

8. Press RETURN to replace the specified word with the selected synonym, or
press ' CANCEL I to return to the first menu and select another syntactic category
-- or exit the function without replacing the specified word by pressing CANCEL
again.
If you select a synonym and press RETURN J, the synonym replaces the current
word.
Type Thesaurus
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABER/TER SEARCH FORM PAGE

ABBREVIATE: PHRASE MAINTENAUTE
EDIT THESAURUS
TYPE THESAURUS'
Press (MENU) to display the function menu.

. Used and t to select ABBRITHR and press C) or RETURN to display the
sub-menu.
Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "A".
Use 0 and TA to select TYPE THESAURUS and press I RETURN The system
asks you to type the word for which a synonym is needed:
TypewOrti: an441x6ss ,,RETURN.

SPECIFIED WORD:
I
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "T".
4. Type the word and press ( RETURN
iNnnooa 31V380
5. From this point, proceed as you would do with the EDIT THESAURUS option
(See "Edit Thesaurus" on page 176, steps 6 to 9)
Increasing Your Typing Speed with CODE A

Abbreviated Phrases ABBR
The abbreviated phrase function is provided to help you increase your typing speed
when you have to frequently type long strings of words ("phrases"). You may store
the phrases in the abbreviated phrase memory, along with a short abbreviation
(the "name" of the phrase). For instance, you may store the phrase "United States
of America" together with the name "USA". Once this has been done, all you have
I78

to do to enter "United States of America" in your document is to type "USA" and
press (doDE)+ (; ) ( ). "USA" will automatically be replaced with "United
States of America". If you type a name that does not exist in the abbreviated phrase
memory, and press :CODE OMR, ( 0 ), you will hear a beep.
The abbreviated phrase memory can store a maximum of 30 phrases and names.
Each phrase can consist of up to 67 characters, while a name is limited to 8
characters. The total amount of data in the abbreviated phrase memory may not
exceed 1,000 characters.
The abbreviated phrase memory can be saved on disk and, of course, retrieved
from the disk. You may create as many abbreviated phrase files as you want, but,
as was the case for user dictionary files, you may have only one abbreviated phrase
file on a disk.
Abbreviated Phrase Maintenance
i7:ABBREVIATED1HRASE'LOAD
EDIT THESAURUS
TYPE THESAURUS
This section explains how to input and edit data in the abbreviated phrase memory.
1. Press (MENI,” to display the function menu.
2. Use E and E to select ABBR/THR, then press E or rRETURN1 to display the
sub-menu.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type ' ".
3. USe Ffl and CC to select ABBREVIATED PHRASE MAINTENANCE and press ( RETURN ;
The following display appears:
<< ABBREVIATED PHRASE » KB:X INS SHIFT 10:22AM
To iiaarir::phits47.77.7t4 .ILETURtit..71treIre e.f.55tit tanici.:::.:13:resti14ENU::' ...
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "M".

4. To enter new data, type the name, press qtlia or CD to switch to the phrase
area, then type the phrase and press ifi i.
• Use only letters, numbers and periods for the name.
179

5. To edit an existing line of data, select the line with T• and R, then press
f RETURN J. The data will appear in the input area. Edit the data, then press
RETURN again.
6. To return to the INPUT/EDIT screen and resume typing, press (cooEl + FILE.1
( (MENU: ) or select Exi-r from the menu.
Using the Function Menu for other Options

MENU
1 FILE
ZXIT PRINT DELETE LOAD SAVE

'S
. ::'TOPCSiiih7
tw : typewriter
USA : United States of America
Select frommenti and pieas RETURN.
1. From the ABBREVIATED PHRASE screen, press (PAENtf, to display a menu

of functions:
• To return to the input screen shown in step (3) above, press , CANCEL
• To select a function from the menu, use F and 0 or type the letter displayed
in bold.
• When the menu is displayed, it is not possible to select a line of data.
2. To exit the abbreviated phrase maintenance screen and return to the
INPUT/EDIT screen, select EXIT and press (REruRw)
Accelerator: To select EXIT, you may type "E".
• Short cut: To exit without displaying the menu, you may press rFiLei
( ( Nu) ) or ( CANCEL.,
3. To print the list of phrases and names, select PRINT and press RETURN )
• Accelerator: To select PRINT, you may type "P".

INUI11000 31V31:10
Short cut: To print without displaying the menu, youmay press CODE PRINT
),
4. To delete a line of data, you must select the data before you display the function
menu. When the data to be deleted is selected, press tiveNul, then select
DELETE and press IRE-rumJ. A message will ask for confirmation:
Accelerator: To select DELETE from the menu, you may type "D".
180

• Short cut: To delete without displaying the menu, you may press COO
- D-E
Press (RETURN) to delete the line or ( CANCEL Ito keep it in memory.

5. To load an abbreviated phrase file, insert the disk, select LOAD and press
(RETURN ,. Remember that loading an abbreviated phrase file will overwrite
the abbreviated phrases in memory.
• Accelerator: To select LOAD, you may type "L".
• Short cut: To load without displaying the menu, you may press (coDEI .
6. To save the abbreviated phrase memory, insert a disk, select SAVE and press
( RETURN ). This message will appear:
Press RETURN . Remember that saving the abbreviated phrase memory onto
a disk that already contains an abbreviated phrase file will overwrite the file
on that disk.
• Accelerator: To select SAVE, you may type "S".
• Short cut: To save without displaying the menu, you may press CODE
Loading an Abbreviated Phrase File
STYLE BLOCK C TR/RMF SPELL IIBBR/THR SEARCH FORM PAGE

• ABBREVIATED., PHRASE LOAD
t ABBREVIATED PHRASE SAVE
EDIT THESAURUS
TYPE THESAURUS
Insert the disk which contains the abbreviated phrase file that you want to use.
2. Press lam) to display the function menu.
3. Use C) and 0 to select ABBR/THR, then press (1) or (RETURN to display the
sub-menu.
4. Use E and (:) to select ABBREVIATED PHRASE LOAD and press ( RETURN J. The
abbreviated phrase file is loaded into the abbreviated phrase memory and you
can now use the abbreviated phrases as explained above.
181

• If you had already input data in the abbreviated phrase memory
(see "Abbreviated Phrase Maintenance" on page 179), that data will be
overwritten when you load a file. To avoid this, first save the current abbre-
viated phrase data onto another disk.
Saving the Abbreviated Phrase Memory

rABBREVIATED PHRASE :SAME
EDIT THESAURUS
TYPE THESAURUS
1. insert the disk on which you want to save the abbreviated phrase memory.
2. Press 'MENU to display the function menu.
3. Use 0 and to select ABBR/THR, ;. or
then press @•• ,'RETURN: to display the
sub-menu.
4. Use 0 and 14, to select ABBREVIATED PHRASE SAVE and press ( RETURN;. This

5. Press (`RETURN') to save the abbreviated phrase memory on the disk.
• Since the system accepts only one abbreviated phrase file per disk, saving
the file will overwrite any old abbreviated phrase file on the disk.
INNI11000 ]1V980
182

Paper and Screen Settings (FORM)
The FORM option of the menu allows you to specify several layout parameters related
to the vertical distribution of text on the paper. It also allows you to display
simultaneously two documents on screen.
Paper Size
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH =FORM PAGE

-P-A•PEPISIZE
HEADER
FFOOTER
SCALE LINE ON/OFF
DUAL SCREEN
t CHANGE SCREEN
When typing, your text will be automatically divided into pages according to the
layout of your page. The paper size function will allow you to set the size of your
top and bottom margins and other layout parameters. Once typing has reached
the bottom of a page, a page break symbol appears on the screen to indicate the
end of the page. If you wish to end a page prior to the automatic page ending, you
may do so by inserting a page break (see "Page Breaks" on page 190).
2. Use E and to select FORM, and press (Bounti.) or 1.
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "F".
3. Use LE and CD to select PAPER SIZE and press E•Ta Jo
4. The "paper size screen" shown below appears.
XXXXXXXX P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX KB:X 9:15AM
TOP MARGIN...'
ORASPACE .: ♦HEADER
PAPER SIZE XX (LINES) TEXT AREA XXX!'
BOTTOW$PACE,,
BPTTOM444RW FOOTER X
,F4 ..-A*OCAZ.l.tAi0:4t.itr#0'.3* • IP.iiiiit'OETURN, to:':1101:141.47- Rtie,,•„
• The text cursor cycles through only five of the eight fields on the screen.
HEADER, FOOTER and TEXT AREA are automatically updated by the machine.
The numbers for HEADER andFOOTER are automatically set to I lineifyou store
183

a header or footer , or 0 lines if there is no header or footer. The length of the
TEXT AREA is defined as the PAPER SIZE less the lines reserved for TOP MARGIN,
HEADER, TOP SPACE, BOTTOM SPACE, FOOTER, and BOTTOM MARGIN.
Paper size settings
indication Meaning
PAPER SIZE The total length of the paper. The default, 66 lines,
is suitable for letter-Size paper.
TOP MARGIN The distance between the top edge of the paper and
the header (if present) or the top of the text (when
there is no header). The default is 6 lines.
HEADER An optional running header. (See "Header and
Footer" on page 185.)
TOP SPACE The distance between the header (if present) and the
first line of the text. If you stored a header, you will
want to enter a number for this selection.
TEXT AREA The number of lines reserved for the body of the text.
BOTTOM SPACE The distance between the last line of the text and the
footer (if present). If you stored a tooter, you will want
to enter a number for this selection.
FOOTER An optional running footer. (See "Header and
Footer" on page 185.)
BOTTOM MARGIN The distance between the footer (if present) or the
last line of the text and the bottom edge of the paper.
The default is 6 lines.
5. Press CD or until you reach the parameter that you wish to change.
6. Type the new value and press l or 0 to move to the next parameter that
you want to change. Notice how the text area value will change to accom-
modate your selections.
7. When all the desired changes have been entered, press [RETURN,J. Alterna-
tively, press CANCEL' to return without storing the new settings.
• Your text will be divided into pages automatically according to the settings for
the paper size. If you wish to begin a new page prior to reaching the line set
INNEN31V380
by the paper size setting, simply insert a page break. (See "Page Breaks" on
page 190.)
184

Header and Footer
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH PAGE

PAPER SIZE
FOOTER
SCALE LINE ON/OFF
DUAL SCREEN
CHANGE SCREEN

PAPER SIZE
READER
Attatzt—z=177T
SCALE LINE ON/OFF
DUAL SCREEN
- CHANGE SCREEN
A header is a title line and/or page number that will be automatically printed at the
top of every page. A footer is a similar line at the bottom of the page.
2. Use E and to select FORM, and press C&MRED or E.
3. Use E and E to select HEADER or FOOTER, and press MEEK.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "H" or "F".
4. Type the header or footer and press kilai.J...4.14. The text of the header or footer
cannot exceed one line. It will disappear from the screen when is
pressed, but will print on the line determined by the paper size setting when
the text is printed. Pressing 1P1 at this step returns the system to the
normal mode without entering the header or footer in memory.
• As mentioned before, entering a header or footer automatically updates the
setting of the PAPER SIZE screen. You may wish to insert a few lines for a
LU
top space or bottom space on the PAPER SIZE screen in order to separate
the body of the text from the header or footer.
• You may have page numbering automatically included in the header or tooter. a
If you type a number enclosed in double quotes, this number will be increm-
LIJ
ented for each page when printed. (The double quotes are not printed.) You CC
C-)
may begin with number i or with a different number if needed. This is useful
if, for instance your document is the third chapter of a book. If chapter 3 starts
at page 23, enter "23". Any number up to four digits in length (9999) is
accepted.
• Example of footer with page numbering:
MONTHLY REPORT MAY 1990 - page "10"
185

• Printing effects (BOLD and UNDERLINE) can also be used with a header and
footer. You may also center the header or footer or make it flush to the right
margin.
Left Margin Right Margin
V
:Using the Boldface is a way of making a Word,
t3hrase or entire Paragraph stand out and catch
he reader's eye. The Boldface feature has a
Bottom Space
'IONTHLY REPORT MAY 1990 - page 10-4---Rmter

Automatic Page Numbering 2 11 Bottom Margin
Disabling the scale
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RIS SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH ritittit'

PAGE
PAPER SIZE
READER
POOTER
tiCidWW
DUAL SCREEN
CHANGE SCREEN
Disabling the scale makes an additional line of the screen available for your text.
1. Use E and to select FORM and press tMEB.2.
• Accelerator: Instead of (1) you may also type "F".
e
2. Use E and to select SCALE LINE ON/OFF and press . You are back
to the INPUT/EDIT screen. If the scale was displayed, it is now disabled, and
IN31111000 31V383
vice-versa.
Accelerator: Instead of (2) you may also type "S".
1S6

The INPUT/EDIT Screen with the Scale ON
XXXXXXXX F:XX L:XXX COL:XXX

XE:X 8:32AM
2 3 4 5 6 • 447....R...
The INPUT/EDIT Screen with the Scale OFF
NEWFILE P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX KB:X

8:32Am
Displaying two Documents

..PAPER SIZE
HEADER
[.FOOTER
SCALE LINE ON/OFF
;iAHMULrdUMW4k-,L,L.„,
CHANGE SCREEN
The dual screen function allows you to work on two documents at the same time.
This function can be used to compare two documents. You may copy a section of
the top file to the bottom file, or vice-versa. (See "Copying a Block into a Different
File on page 158.)
1. Press IMENu) to display the menu.
2. Use CD and E to select FORM, and press RETURN: or E.
3. Use and e to select DUAL SCREEN, and press CAA.,,,z,A. The INPUT/EDIT
screen is reduced to its upper half, and a MEMORY INDEX appears on the
lower half of the display (for details about the MEMORY INDEX screen,
see "MEMORY INDEX Screen" on page 194).
4 Use 0, CD, CD, and 0 to select a text file and press tiNETIJRNI. The text of this
file is now displayed in the lower half of the screen.
187

XXXXXXXX P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX
0 L 2 3 4 5 6
Text of the first file
)0000UOCX P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX KB:X 8:22AM

0 L 2 3 4 5 6 4i7....R...
Text of the second file
5. You may now edit the document in the lower half of the screen exactly in the
same way as in the usual full-size INPUT/EDIT screen. The only difference
is that the text area is smaller.
Switching to the Other Document CODE Q

(When displaying two documents)

PAPER SIZE
:READER
TOOTER
SCALE LINE ON/OFF
P DUAL SCREEN
i-CSANGE :SCREEN.
1. Press ['WU) to display the menu.

2. Use E and a) to select FORM, and press .i.RETURN% or CD.
3. Use 0 and E to select CHANGE SCREEN, and press LRETURN . The cursor
immediately moves to the text displayed on the upper half if it was in the lower
half, and vice-versa.
iNuinooa 31V3H3

• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press + a.
Returning to Normal INPLITIEDIT Screen

(When displaying two documents)
To return to the normal INPUT/EDIT screen, you must store one of the two files
that are displayed on the dual screen.
1. Use the CHANGE SCREEN function described above to position the cursor on
the document that you want to store in memory.
188

2. Press coDE) + LFLE and proceed to store or abandon the document
(see "Saving Your Work" on page 192). The document that was not selected
for storing is now displayed on a full-size INPUT/EDIT screen.
189

Printing a Page (PAGE)
The last option of the function menu (PAGE) allows you to print a single page of your
document. This function can be used to check the layout. It also allows you to
insert page breaks that will inform the printer to eject the sheet of paper and print
the next part of the document on another sheet.
Page Breaks
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBR/THR SEARCH FOR PAGE

PAGE BREAK
PA317
The text is always automatically formatted so that a maximum number of lines can
fit on one page. If you do not insert a page break by following the steps below, an
automatic page break will be inserted once the maximum number of lines per page
is reached. This is determined by the setting on the PAPER SIZE screen (see
"Paper Size" on page 183). Each time you want to start a new page prior to the
automatic page ending, proceed as follows to insert a page break symbol " " in
your text:
1. Position the cursor where the page break symbol has to be inserted.
2. Press (MENU; to display the menu.
3. Use F and CD to select PAGE, and press RETURN ,
5. Use nri• and CD to select PAGE BREAK on the sub-menu, and press RETURN1. A
page break symbol " I " will indicate that point, and the cursor will move to
the next line. The page count (P indicator) is incremented and the line count
(L indicator) restarts from 1. If you change your mind, you can always erase
this symbol {and eliminate the page break) with (Bs).
IN3vinooa 31Y380

190

Page Printing CODE
r ts
PRINT
4
STYLE BLOCK CTR/RMF SPELL ABBPITHB SEARCH FORM agigtH

17 PAGE BREAK
r,BOCABIlitr,
When you print a single page from the INPUT/EDIT screen, all settings like header,
tooter, and keyboard changes are effective. The merge symbols (see "Creating
the Master Document" on page 210), however, do not cause data to be inserted,
but instead are printed as blank spaces.
1. Make sure that your printer is ready.
2. Position the cursor on the page that you want to print.
4. Use and CI to select PAGE, and press L____1_A14
RET
5. Use CD and E to select PAGE PRINT on the sub-menu, and press RETURNj.
Printing starts.
• Short cut: Instead of (3), (4), and (5), you may press ( CODE 4. (paw; (CD).
191

File Operations -- Memory
Saving Your Work

The current file is kept in the memory even if the power is turned off accidentally
during editing. If you were working on a retrieved file, the file will be automatically
saved under the same file name. If you were working on a *NEWFILE, the next time
you switch the machine on and enter your password. your document will auto-
matically re-appear on the screen as you left it at the end of the previous session.
However, if the power is turned off during an operation like Search and Replace,
data error may occur and you may not be able to retrieve the file. For that reason,
it is not a good idea to switch the power off while editing. When your document is
completed, or when you need a break, proceed as explained below.
Saving a New File

CODE MENU
FILE
After creating a new file (the file name that appears on the upper-left corner of the
screen is *NEWFILE), you have the options of saving or abandoning the file.
1. Press (CODE) (FILE; ( (MENU 1 ) to display the following prompt on the message
line:
Save file to internal memory? Press RETURN to save, COPE - S to abandon.
2. Press RETURN if you want to save the file, or CODE 1 (01 if the file is not worth
saving.
WARNING: if youpress 000E ), the MEMORYINDEX screen appears
without saving, and your work is lost.
INN111000 31V3HO
• Press ( CANCEL ) instead of RETURN or CODE + (D1 to return to the INPUT/EDIT

screen without doing anything.
3. If you have pressed (RETURN ), the machine asks you to input a file name:
TURN,-
rF ype filename and prets'
ILENAME: I
4. Type the file name (See "Entering a File Name" on page 193) and press
[RtruRN1. The machine returns to the MEMORY INDEX screen and you can
confirm that the new file appears in the list.
192

Saving an Edited file S MENU
CODE
FILE
0
After editing an old file (the file name that appears on the upper-left corner of the
screen is not •NEWFILE), press (cons:,' (FILE MENLO ). The new version immediately
replaces the old one in the memory and the MEMORY INDEX screen appears.
Entering a File Name

When you are requested to enter a file name, the MEMORY INDEX screen shows
a list of the text files already saved in the memory. The list of text files is displayed
so that you can easily avoid entering a file name that is already used for another
file. When typing a file name, please keep the following rules in mind:
1. A file name is made of up to eight characters. A beep sounds if you try to
input more.
2. Only the following characters can be accepted in file names: upper and lower
case letters of the alphabet (A-Z and a-z), the digits (0 to 9), and the hyphen
(-). All others are refused and trigger a beep.
3. Upper and lower case letters are distinguished. You may, for example, have
files named "AAA" and "aaa" in the memory.
4. To correct an error, use c, (cow f
WOFID OUT ( (if) ), or CODE + LINE OUT
( O ) to erase the preceding letter(s), or use and CD to move the text cursor
back over the name and retype.
5. Ifyou have more files than can be displayed on the screen, use °, 0,
-t-P S (Q ), andLcoDE ,NExT S: ( CD ) to scroll the file names on the INDEX
when typing a new file name.
6. If you enter a name that is already used by another document — check
thelist on the screen to avoid this situation pressing ( RETURN 3 displays
the following prompt on the message line.
• Press CANCEL ) to enter another file name. Press t RETURN ) to overwrite

the file and return to the MEMORY INDEX screen. Overwriting replaces
the old text with the new text.
193

MEMORY INDEX Screen CODE MENU
ALE
To view the list of the files stored in memory, press CODE ) + (FILE) ( NY1 ).
If you do this while the INPUT/EDIT screen message shown below is still displayed,
the MEMORY INDEX screen appears immediately.
( Start typing your text. Press FILE to finish.
If you have typed text (the above message is no longer displayed), when you press
CODE1 (ALE, ), you are able to store the data. (For details, see "Saving
Your Work" on page 192.)
Example of MEMORY INDEX display:
« MEMORY INDEX » MEMORY:XX.XK SHIFT 9:22AM
TEXT1 (XX.X) TEXT2 (XXX)
Seledt a'filecand.prets- URN. Press CANCEL for MAXN MENU.
File Length and Remaining Memory Space

The numbers displayed in parentheses at the right of the file names indicate the
size of the files in kilobytes.
The number following the indicator MEMORY indicates the memory free space in
kilobytes.
Selecting a File
INN111300 31M3
A file name can be selected by moving the cursor with the cursor keys. If you have
more files in memory than the amount that can be displayed on the screen, 0 and
will scroll the display. You may also use tams' ( 0 ) and
NEXT S • ( ) to scroll faster.
Functions Available on the MEMORY INDEX Screen

(RETURN is used to retrieve a file. Other functions are available on the function
menu that you can display by pressing DIEM')
194

Retrieving Previous Work
RETURN
MO CIA
Once the MEMORY INDEX screen is displayed, select the name of the file that you
want to retrieve as explained above and press [RETURN ; . The beginning of the
document will be displayed on the INPUT/EDIT screen.
Printing a File in Memory CODE
PRINT
COPY DELETE RENAME ALL DELETE DISK SAVE
1. Move the cursor to the file on the MEMORY INDEX that you want to print.
2. Press „ to display the menu.
3. Use 24- and a)
to select PRINT, and press (RETuRIC. The print menu screen
shown below appears.
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "P".
Short cut: Instead of steps (2) and (3), you may simply press (CODE) + ( PRINT)
(0 ).
<< PRINT MENU » PRINT FILE:XXXXXXXX Sain 9:22AM
STARTING PAGE I
ENDING PAGE 999
NUMBER OF COPIES 1
HEADER PRINT YES
FOOTER PRINT YES
MERGE PRINT NO
DOUBLE COLUMNS NO
SPACE BET. COLUMNS 5
PAPER HANDLING Manual
Type neinbegiwij:Alt:printer4,:prese RgTURN-t0 ster4fgpxititth
195

PRINT MENU screen
Option Meaning
STARTING PAGE The page number of the file on which printing is to
start. The setting must be greater than zero and less
than 1000. The default is 1 (starting from the first
page).
ENDING PAGE The page number of the file on which printing is to
end. Must not be lower than the STARTING PAGE
number. If the number is higher than the total number
of pages, printing stops after the last page. The
default is 999.
NUMBER OF COPIES The number of copies you want to print. Must be
greater than zero and less than 100. The default is
1 (the pages are printed once).
HEADER PRINT Use ( to toggle between YES and NO. If
YES, any existing header will be printed on each page.
if NO, no header will be printed, even if you have
entered one.
FOOTER PRINT Use to toggle between YES and NO. If
YES, any existing footer will beprinted on each page.
If NO, no footer will be printed, even if you have
entered one.
MERGE PRINT This should be left as NO when printing ordinary
document files. (See "Merge Printing" on page 210.)
DOUBLE COLUMNS This should be left as NO when printing ordinary
document files. (See "Double Columns Printing" on
page 198.)
SPACE BET. COLUMNS This is used together with the above double columns
printing and should be ignored when printing ordinary
document files. (See "Double Columns Printing" on
page 198.)
PAPER HANDLING Use to set to Manual or Continuous,
depending of the paper feed system of your printer.
Select Continuous if your printer is equipped with an
automatic cut sheet feeder or if you are using con-
AMMO 31V HO
tinuous paper. Select Manual if you have to insert

paper manually, one sheet at a time.
• The default values for STARTING PAGE, ENDING PAGE, and NUMBER OF COPIES
are displayed each time the print menu screen is called up.
4. Move the cursor with E and GE to any values you would like to change, and
change using tiSPAceBO01 for YES/NO setting, or by typing the desired value
for the other options.
5. Set the printer and press ('RETURN' after inserting paper.
You may press ) at any time to terminate selection and return to the
MEMORY INDEX screen.
196

• If there is a wrong setting on the PRINT MENU (for example, STARTING PAGE
is greater than the endingpage number), the following message appears and
you have to correct it to the right setting.
Incorrect setting.
6. With a Brother HR Series Daisy Wheel Printer, if this is the first time you are
printing the file, or if you have previously printed a file using a different pitch,
you will be prompted to install the proper daisy wheel to match the pitch setting
selected. Insert the correct wheel, if necessary, and press ( RETURN
7. As soon as printing starts, the following message is displayed:
Printing. Press SPACE to pause.
Pausing/Resuming Printing
(SPACE BAR)
Sometimes you may wish to temporarily interrupt printing -- to adjust the paper
position, for example.
1. Press (SPACEBAR), to stop the printer. A message indicating that the printer
is paused will be displayed.
Printing paused. Press SPACE to continue.
2. Press (SPACE BAR) to restart the printer. The above message reappears:
Printing. Press SPACE to pause.
• Printing in progress can be terminated by pressing CANCEL ).

• When printing is completed (or cancelled with the (-CANCEL key), the system
returns to the MEMORY INDEX screen.
Daisy Wheel Changes (only with Brother HR Series Printers)

Each time the system finds a pitch change or a keyboard change in the file, printing
is interrupted and a message similar to the following will appear:
Change to ASCII 12 wheel and press RETURN.
197

This means that an ASCII wheel of pitch 12 is required at this point. Change the
wheel and press ( RETURN to resume printing.
Double Columns Printing

This function allows you to print your text in newspaper fashion, with two columns
across the page. A page on the screen will be printed as a column on paper. In
other words, two pages will be printed on a single sheet of paper, the first page as
the left column and the second page as the right column.
When formatting your document for double columns printing, you should reduce
the distance between margins so that both columns and the space between columns
can fit on the paper. The margins for the document should be set for one column.
It is also recommended to use pitch 12 or 15 in order to fit enough text on a line.
• Double columns printing does not work with merge printing. Merge symbols
are ignored during double columns printing, and replaced with blank spaces.
• To ensure proper column alignment, the document must not contain any
margin orpitch or line spacing changes. It may, however, contain any number
of keyboard and tab stop changes.
1. Proceed as you would do to print a text file in standard format. (See "Printing
a File in Memory" on page 195.)
2. When the print menu screen appears, set DOUBLE COL₹JMNS to YES. If nec-
essary, set the SPACE BET(ween) COLUMNS (the default is five blank spaces
and the available range is from 1 to 50). At this point, you may also change
other settings on the menu as well, but you must not set the MERGE PRINT
option to YES.
3. Press (tRETURN to start printing.
iN3M000 31VRIO
198

Right Margin Setting for Double Columns Printing
XXXXXX}OC P:XX L:XXX COL:XXX KB:X 9 :10Abt
0 L 2 • 3 5 6 7
Right Margin
Double Columns Printout
Page 1 (on screen) Page 2 (on screen)
Space between Columns (Default = 5)
Copying a File in Memory CODE C
PRINT gOP DELETE RENAME ALL DELETE DISK SAVE
You may wish to edit a file and keep both the old and new version in memory.
Simply make a copy of the file before editing it.
1. Move the cursor on the MEMORY INDEX screen to the file that you want to
copy.
2. Press (. i) to display the menu.
3. Use E and t to select COPY, and press DIERIFIN . The following message
appears:
FILENAME: II
199

• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may simply press [CODE
4. input the new file name and press (mum J. The following message is dis-
played during the copy operation
'Copying the file ... please wait.
and disappears after completion. The system then returns to the MEMORY
INDEX screen.
• if the specified new file name already exists in the memory when you
press NJ in step (4), the following message appears:
• Press LFIETURN to overwrite or _owe.] to change the file name and

proceed as in step (4). Overwriting replaces the old data with the new
data.
Deleting a File from the Memory At

CODE D
ELITE RENAME ALL DELETE DISK SAVE

I PRINT COPY
Deletion of unwanted files is useful to make room in the memory for new files.
1. Move the cursor on the MEMORY INDEX to the file that you want to delete.
3. Use E and to select DELETE, and press ifiErurvi J. The following message
INNI11000 3O380
appears:
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "O".

• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may simply press +CE.
4. Press = to delete the file. If you press ANOEL.), the message disap-
pears and the system goes back to the MEMORY INDEX screen without
deleting the file.
200

Renaming a File in Memory CODE
I PRINT COPY DELETE IRENAME ALLDELETE DISK SAVE

Renaming files is often useful when you want to improve the organization of your
data.
t. Move the cursor on the MEMORY INDEX screen to the file that you want to
rename.
2. Press `MENU to display the menu.
3. Use Ed and E to select RENAME, and press [RETURN The following message
appears:
IFILENAME:
TYPe ileneutieltWASktss.lkriVIV4

• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press
4. Input the new file name and press RETURN to rename.
• If the specified new file name already exists when you press CROWN in
step (4), the following message appears:
'FILENAME:
ILENAME
:
Proceed as in step (4), using a different file name.
CREATE DOCUMENT
• Pressing 115Unni while a message is displayed cancels the operation and
returns the system to the MEMORY INDEX screen.
Switching to the DISK INDEX

A
CODE K
Screen J
KB
SAVE
I PRINT COPY DELETE RENAME ALLDELETE LIU
This function is used to display the list of files saved on a disk.
201

1. Insert the disk into the drive.
2. Press (MENU) to display the menu.
3. Use @j and l to select DISK, and press ( RETURN J. The DISK INDEX screen
shown on page 204 appears.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "K".
• Short cut: Instead of (2), and (3) you may press COVE + C.
Transferring a File from Memory to Disk
PRINT COPY DELETE RENAME ALL DELETE DISK SANE
The SAVE function is used to copy a file from the memory to a disk. Once the file
is saved on a disk, you may delete it from the memory in order to make room for
new documents. A disk can contain about 240,000 characters of text (or about 240
pages).
1. Insert a disk in the drive.
2. Move the cursor on the MEMORY INDEX to the file that you want to transfer
to the disk.
4. Use E. and ED to select SAVE, and press (!RED:,. If the file name selected
does not exist on the disk, the file is saved immediately and the system returns
to the MEMORY INDEX screen.
• Short cut: Instead of (3) and (4), you may press LOODEi + CD.
5. If the file name already exists on the disk, the following message appears:

INNI111000 31V31:10
6. Press LFLELL_NIAJ to overwrite or CANCEL1 to change file name. If you press

, the following message appears:
"Mastianuss d-
FILENAME:0
7. Input a new file name and press illMAW to save the file on the disk. You
may also press E at this step to escape.
• Overwriting replaces the old data with the new data.
202

Deleting All Files in Memory
PRINT COPY DELETE RENAME ;;,E7.4. DISK SAVE
If the memory contains only unwanted files, you could clear it by deleting the files
one by one. The ALL DELETE function does this faster.
1. Press C ) to display the menu.
2. Use 0 and to select ALL DELETE, and press (-mum . The following
message appears:
Delete all text files and Scheduler file? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no) .
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type 'A".

3. If you press , all the files are deleted. Press if you want to
escape.
203

File Operations -- DISK
In the explanations below, we assume that the DISK INDEX screen is displayed.
To display that screen, refer to "Switching to the DISK INDEX Screen" on page
201
The DISK INDEX screen is very similar to the MEMORY INDEX screen. The only
differences are:
*NEWFILE is not displayed.
In addition to your text files created in the Create Document mode, the files
created in the Address Book and Scheduler/Calendar are also displayed.
These file names are followed with an extension MRG (Address Book) or DTB
(Scheduler) for easy identification. Text files have no extension.
« DISK INDEX » REMAIN:XXX.XK SEM 9:22AM
3TXT1 .tgXatft TEXT2 (XX.X) TEXTS (XX.X)

ADDRESS1.MRG (XX.X) ADDRESS2.MRG (XX.X) SCHEDULE.DTB (XX.X)
ct 41' Ile,' eesAtObnl. ess 'CANCEL- 40k MeM04Y INDEx.
Copying a File on the Disk CODE
DELETE RENAME DISK COPY MEMORY DISK DELETE LOAD
1. With the DISK INDEX displayed, move the cursor to the file that you want to
copy.
11431/111100031V380
3. Use E and (4) to select COPY, and press . The following message
appears:

• Short cut: instead of (2) and (3), you may simply press (CODE + g.
4. insert the destination disk and press tti.,31 or press t CANCEL ) to return to
the DISK INDEX screen. This message will appear:
204

ITyp filename , and Riess
IF 7 7 NAME : I
5. Input the new file name and press ( RETURN ). The following message is dis-
played during the copy operation
Copying the file ... please wait.
and disappears after completion. The system then returns to the DISK INDEX
screen.
If the specified new file name already exists on the inserted disk when
you press (RETURN 1 in step (4), the following message appears:
• Press [RETURN) to overwrite or (CANCEL to change the file name and

proceed as in step (4).
Deleting a File from a Disk CODE
COPY RENAME DISK COPY MEMORY DISK DELETE LOAD
File deletion is useful when the disk is full and you want to make room for new
documents.
delete.
3. Use 0 and C3 to select DELETE, and press ReTuRf4J. The following message
appears:
Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "D".

Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may simply press CODE + J.
4. Press RETURN:.- to delete the file. Press if you want to escape.
205

Renaming a File on Disk CODE
•
ai
I COPY DELETE ,RE LtimE DISK COPY MEMORY DISK DELETE LOAD
To change the name of a file, follow these steps.

rename.
3. Use E and E. to select RENAME, and press ( 1. The following message
appears:
rope 'tiierialiteerwelvittunr
FILENAME:
• Accelerator: Instead of (3), you may type "Fi".

4. Input the new file name and press . The above message disappears,
and the DISK INDEX screen is updated.
• If the specified new file name already exists when you press in step
(4), the following message appears:
rileneme
IF ILENAME :
• Proceed as in step (4), using a different file name.

Pressing while a message is displayed cancels the operation and
INN,111000 31V380
returns the system to the DISK INDEX screen.
Copying a Disk (Back-Up Copy) CODE 0

JUST
azsic :ectesx LOAD

I COPY DELETE RENAME MEMORY DISK DELETE
This function allows you to make back-up copies of important disks. It is a good
idea to make back-up copies of important disks, to avoid accidental erasures.
206

1. Press *EN(/' to display the menu.
2. Use 0 and 0 to select DISK COPY, and press ( RETURN), The following
message appears:
Ail memory files must be saved on disk or deleted before using DISK COPY.
Press CODE+S to save files, CODE+D to delete files.

• Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press 'CODE', +
3. The DISK COPY function makes use of the entire memory and all your files
must be saved on disk or deleted before you start. To save the files, insert a
disk and press fboDE) + 0. To delete the files, press (CODE) + rtil. You may
also press CANCEL. to return to the DISK INDEX screen. When the operation
is completed, this message will appear:
Insert source disk and press RETURN.
4. Insert the source (original) disk and press (FtErLiRkj. Wait while the machine
copies the disk data into memory. The following message will then appear:
WARNING: Copying an entire disk to another destroys any data that

may be on the destination disk. Check the destination disk before
starting. Be sure your destination disk has been initialized.
5. Insert the destination disk and press BURN.., then wait for the following
prompt to appear:
Insert source disk and press RETURN.
▪ Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the data have been copied (since the
memory can only hold a certain amount of data at one time, you will need
to alternatively insert the source (original) and destination disks several
times, regardless of the amount of data to be copied).
• You may press V': at any time (except during disk access) to cancel the
operation.
207

Switching to the CODE M
MEMORY INDEX Screen M CODE
-v
COPY DELETE RENAME DISK COPY MEMORY DISK DELETE LOAD I
To return to the MEMORY INDEX screen from the DISK INDEX screen, proceed
as follows.
1. Press cMENUJ to display the menu.
2. Use 0 and CD to select MEMORY, and press RETURN.;. The MEMORY INDEX
screen appears immediately. You may also press (CANCEL. to escape from
the menu.
• Accelerator: instead of (2), you may type "M".
• Short cut: Instead of (1) and (2), you may press tooDE, FPC.
Disk Delete (Deleting All Files)
COPY DELETE RENAME DISK COPY MEMORY J1181443ELETE LOAD t
DISK DELETE erases all of the files from the disk.

• Initializing a disk also deletes all data that it might contain (see "Initia-
lizing New Disks" on page 12).
1. With the DISK INDEX displayed, press MENU to display the menu.
2. Use 0 and 0 to select DISK DELETE, and press RETURN . The following
message appears:
1N3M000 31V31:10
Delete all files? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).
• Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "T".

3. If you press , the files are deleted from the disk. Press cANc0.1., to
avoid deleting.
208

Transferring a File from Disk to CODE
Memory L WO
•
COPY DELETE RENAME DISK COPY l*EMORY DISK DELETE TOAD
The LOAD function is used to transfer a file from a disk to the memory. This function
is very useful because you cannot select a file for editing or printing directly from
the DISK INDEX screen.
• The files that you are allowed to load depend on the mode you are coming
from, Create Document, Address Book, or Scheduler/Calendar. For instance.
the machine will refuse to load an Address Book file if you are coming from
the Create Document mode.
load in the memory.
2. Press (MENU) to display the menu.
3. Use CD and i. to select LOAD, and press RENJRN ), If the file name selected
does not exist in the memory, the file is loaded immediately.
• Short cut: Instead of (2) and (3), you may press CODE 4- To.
4. If the file name already exists in the memory, the following message appears:
5. Press „IttruRit-) to overwrite or (cANcEt..) to change file name. If you press

CANCEL), this message will appear:
ype .filenelMe and Press RETURN;

r ILENAME: I
6. Input the new file name and press I RETURN i to load the file. You may also
press `CANCEL:) at this step to escape.
• Overwriting replaces the old data with the new data.
209

Data Merge
The data merge function is extremely useful when a similar letter is to be sent to
numerous addresses, and each letter is to be typed with a different name and
address and slightly different contents. To save you from having to recall, edit and
print the same letter over and over, the merge file function was created to do the
job automatically. The following steps summarize the use of this powerful function:
Creating the Merge File

To use the data merge function, you must first create a file containing the data to
be inserted in the letters (the merge file). This is done using the ADDRESS BOOK
mode of the MAIN MENU (see "Address Book" on page 49). The data to be inserted
into a single letter is called a record. A record is made of different labels (label 1,
label 2, label 3, etc.) that correspond to the different pieces of information you need
to insert in a single letter (name, address, etc.).
1 If the ADDRESS BOOK file that you want to use has been saved on disk, load
it into the memory (see "Loading a File from a Disk" on page 73).
2. Mark (enable) the records that you want to be merged with your master
document (see "Preparing a Record for Merge Printing" on page 55).
3. Exit the ADDRESS BOOK mode.
Creating the Master Document CODE

M CODE
1. Use the Create Document mode to create a file containing the text that will be
common to all letters (the master document). Wherever a piece of variable
information has to be inserted in that text, press ,CODE + M CODE ( ii ). The
MRG: indicator appears on the status line. Type the label number that
corresponds to the appropriate column in the ADDRESS BOOK that should
be inserted. Press ( RETURN . A merge symbol "Ei " appears in the text.
INN111000 314380
2. When the master document is complete, save it into the memory (see "Saving
Your Work" on page 192).
Merge Printing
1. Print the master document from the MEMORY INDEX screen (see "Printing
a File in Memory" on page 195). When the print menu screen appears, set
the MERGE PRINT option to YES. At this point, you may also change other
settings on the menu as well. Press RETuRt4) to exit the print menu.
• Ifyou try to print the master document from the INPUT/EDIT screen, the merge
symbols will be printed as blank spaces.
210

2. Press rOIEN to exit the PRINT MENU and start printing.
If there is no data in the Address Book file corresponding to a merge symbol
in the text file, a single space wilt be printed.
Printing of merge data is done according to the mode (NORMAL, BOLD,
UNDERLINE, etc.) in effect when the merge symbol was entered.
211

Optional Business Letter Template Disk
An optional Business Letter Template disk is available. This disk is provided to
help you writing business letters. The sample letters stored on this disk are divided
into different categories. Each file contains several letters of the same category.
After a file is loaded into the machine's memory, you are able to select the letter
which fits your purpose. You can then editthat letter by changing names, addresses,
date, etc. You can also add new text. When your letter is ready, you can delete
the other letters from the file and save your letter.
Operation
1. Insert the Brother Business Letters disk in the disk drive.
2. Select 4. CREATE DOCUMENT from the MAIN MENU.
3. When the INPUT/EDIT screen appears, press (CODE) + (FILET (MENU i ) to switch
to the MEMORY INDEX screen.
4. Press [MENU' to display the function menu and select DISK to switch to the DISK
INDEX screen. A list of the files stored on the disk appears on the screen.
5. Highlight the desired file and press :co0s1+ EI to load it into memory.
6. Remove the Brother Business Letters disk from the disk drive.
7. Press r CANCEL ) to return to the MEMORY INDEX screen.
8. Highlight the file again and press ( RETURN) to display it on the INPUT/EDIT
screen. The titles of the letters in the file are displayed on the INPUT/EDIT
screen as the first page of the file.
9. Use (coDE; + GO TO j ( Loj ) to jump to the desired letter.
10. Press (ooDE1 + O and highlight all the text in the letter by using the cursor
keys.
11. Press CODE j TEMP) ( 0 ) to store the text into a temporary file.
12. Press f.coDE.) (FiLel ( to return to the MEMORY INDEX.
MENU 1 )
1N3W11000 311HO
13. Select NEWFILE to display a blank INPUT/EDIT screen.

14. Press (core') + (TEMP: ( ) and then LBETURN Ito recall the temporary file.
15. Edit the letter.

16. Press (cociEl + (FILE) ( (MENU) ), then ( RETURN Enter a new file name and press
(ReuRNj again to save your letter.
212

Line by Line
Printing a Line at a Time as You Type

In the Line by Line mode, your machine allows you to type on paper without storing.
You type your text line by line. The line is automatically transferred to the printer
after completion. Since your text is not kept in memory, this mode will be used to
type short texts like addresses on envelopes or short memos.
How to Start?
1. Make sure that your printer is connected and that the printer parameters are
correctly set. See "Printer Set Up" on page 22 for details.
« MAIN MENU »
4 PONME.71! 9. FAX
ZIWAY: ' 0. DISK APPLICATION
Type umber or move cursor and press RETUM Ptess MENU for mote selections.-
3. Move the cursor to 5. LINE BY LINE using the cursor keys and press RETURN
The LINE BY LINE screen shown on the next.page appears.
Using the Line by Line Mode

Simply type your text. If the last word cannot fit on the line, delete it. Press RETURN
to send the line to the printer and start typing the next line. You are allowed to set
the margins and to use some layout functions. For details see:
• "Setting Up" on page 216
• "Layout Functions" on page 219
• "Printer Set Up" on page 22
How to Finish
After typing your text, simply turn the machine off or press + (FILE) MENU
to return to the MAIN MENU.
213

The LINE BY LINE Screen
Wei FEJ
L.SPACE:X.X
I
CTR EXP BLD CRT INS SHIFT
✓INE BY LINE DEAL:XY
BS:.X
MAF.C17:.:
RM: XXX
Start typing your text. Press FILE to finish.
Text Line
This is where the text that you type will appear. The text cursor (solid box) indicates
where you are. The text is sent to the printer and disappears from the text line
when you press ( RETURN
Message Area
This line is reserved for guide messages (prompts) that ask you a question, give
direction or display error messages that warn you when something is wrong.
• For a list of error messages, see "Error Messages" on page 267.
Function Menu \ -.MENU
FILE
When you press tMENU„ a menu of functions appears on top of the screen. These
functions are identical to the STYLE and c-rRiRroF functions of the Create Document
mode.
STYLE CTRIRMF
r--
m 214

Status Line
The status line indicators remind you where you are and what settings you have
selected.
Indicators of the LINE BY LINE screen

indicator Meaning
REMAIN:XXX Remaining free length of the line.
PITCH:XX Current pitch (10, 12, or 15).
L.SPACE:X.X Current line spacing (1.0, 1.5, or 2.0).
KB:X Current keyboard selection ( I or 11).
SHIFT On if the keyboard is in uppercase mode.
CAPS On if the keyboard is in caps lock mode.
INS On when the insert mode is activated.
EXP On when the expand function is activated.
P BS:X Displays the superimposed character when the cursor is
on the base character. (Displayed two lines below the
Status line).
DEAD:XX Displays the dead character when the cursor is on the
base character. (Displayed two lines below the Status
line).
BLD On when the bold function is activated.
CNT On when the continuous underline function is activated.
WRD On when the word underline function is activated.
RMF On when the right margin flush function is activated.
CTR On when the centering function is activated.
LM:XXX Indicates the left margin setting (under the text line).
RM:XXX Indicates the right margin setting (under the text line).
215

Setting Up
Setting Margins • N
L MAR
CODE $
4
[ R MAR
CODE
L 5
Press CODE + L MAR; ) or ISODE ( R MAR ( ). The cursor moves to
the MARGIN indicator.
2. Use El', and E'kJ to move the cursor to the left or right margin setting. Type the
desired setting and press [ RETURN You may also press CANCEL to return to
the input line without changing the settings.
• The margins are reset to their default values (to and 75) each time you start
with the Line by Line mode.
Selecting the Pitch PITCH
CODE
1
1. Press idoriE] + (PITCH ) repeatedly to select PITCH:10, PITCH:12, or PITCH:15.
2. If you are using a daisy wheel printer, install the corresponding daisy wheel.
• The pitch can be changed only before entering text on the screen.
• The pitch is reset to its default value (10) each time you start with the Line by
Line mode.
Selecting the Line Space 4.c

LINE
CODE
Press (CODE) (LINE) ( ) repeatedly to select L. SPACE:1.0, L. SPACE:1.5, or L.

SPACE:2.0.
• The line space is reset to its default value (to) each time you start with the
Line by Line mode.
r-
z
m
w
-
z
m 216

Corrections 85
To delete a character on the line, move the cursor to the right of the character and
press (as..
To delete an entire word, position the cursor next to the last character of the word
and press (tom) + ( WORD OUT , ( Li )
To delete an entire line, position the cursor next to the last character of the line and
press (CODE' + LINE OUT ( ).
To insert text, position the cursor at the insertion position, press (CODE' + f INSERT
( ) to display the INS indicator, and start typing. When the INS indicator is off,
the characters that you type overwrite the old ones.
Caps Lock vs. Shift Lock CAPS
SHIFT LOCK
CODE CAPS
SHIFT LOCK
Uppercase characters will be printed if you hold isHIFri down while pressing any
other key.
To type an entire string of uppercase characters, press CODE + SHIFT LOCK
( (CAPS: ) once. The SHIFT indicator shows up and all characters you type will be
uppercase characters. To cancel this, press (SHIFT).
If you want to enter strings of capital letters in combination with numbers, press
CAPS . The CAPS indicator will show up and all alphabetic keys will give capitals
while other keys are kept in lower case mode. To cancel, press (CAPS) again. When
the CAPS indicator is on, holding down (sHirrj temporarily changes the CAPS indicator
to the SHIFT indicator. Pressing (CODE + SHIFT LOCK ( `CAPS' ) in the same cir-
cumstance switches to SHIFT. Pressing (SHIFT switches back to CAPS.
SHIFT LOCK CAPS
I
NEW WORK ORGANIZER! (MODEL PN-123XZ)
Congratulations on your purchase of this new Word
Shift
LINE BY LINE
217

Selecting the Keyboard CODE K
KB
1. When you need to print characters that are not available on the current
keyboard, press (cow + ) to select KB:I or KB:ll.
2. If you are using a daisy wheel printer, install the corresponding daisy wheel.
• The keyboard setting can be changed only before entering text on the screen.
Permanent Backspace CODE • BS
The permanent backspace function is used to print superimposed characters such

as "0" and "I" to produce a struck out zero, or "Y" and "=" to produce a Japanese
Yen currency symbol.
1. Type the base character "V".
2. Press E + W. The P BS:X indicator appears.
3. Type the character which is to be imposed "=". The superimposed character
will reappear on the status line if you move the cursor to the base character.
4. To delete superimposed characters, simply delete the base character.
Accents and Special Symbols ("Dead" Keys)

The ASCII keyboard (KB:I) supports the characters with diacritical marks of such
languages as French, German, and Spanish.
1. Switch to KB:l using (corm ( CC )-
2. Type the dead character (example: ^ ).
3. Type the base character (example: o ).
3Nn A8 Mil
218

Layout Functions
Adding Effects (STYLE)

The effects provided by the STYLE option on the function menu allow you to enhance
the appearance of your document. They include bold characters, underlining,
automatic insertion of blanks (expand), as well as superscripts and subscripts.
Bold Face Characters

CODE
'STYLE CTR/RXF
,...siol4p.,,,..,.,„:„,. . _. •orr.:. (ON)
EXPAND OFF (ON)
SUPER SUB ON/OFF OFF (SUPER) (SUB)
If you want to turn the bold function on before typing, skip this step. If you
want to change the type face of a portion of text already typed, position the
cursor at the beginning of that portion.
2. Press (mow to display the menu.
3. Use E and l to select STYLE, and press l,-7;0 or El
4. Use E and (i) to select BOLD.
5. Use ( (SPACE BARI ) to turn the bold function ON.
• Accelerator: Instead of (4) and (5), you may type "B".
6. Press LRETURN , . The eLo indicator is now on.
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), you may press + (13 to
switch the bold function ON/OFF.
7. The text you now type or the text you scan by moving the cursor right is
displayed in bold. If you move the cursor past the desired position, simply
move back to unmark. To move the cursor to the beginning or the end of the
line, ( E ) and Mogi + iiM;55D ( Eft ).
8. To return to normal typing, repeat steps (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) to turn the
bold function OFF, or press Mpe;
CC +
LL!
• To undo bold characters, position the cursor just after the last bold character, z
turn the bold function ON, andmove the cursor to the left. Turn the bold function
oFF to stop undoing bold.
CD
LLI
219 -J

Using the Boldface is a way of making a Word,
Phrase or entire Paragraph stand out and catch
the reader's eye. The Boldface feature has a
Underlining
CODE N
STYLE CTR/RmF
HOLD OFF (ON)
:AINDERZINE ., °::::::..: OFF (CNT) (WRD)
EXPAND OFF (ON)
SUPER SUB ON/OFF OFF (SUPER) (SUB)
if you want to turn the underline function on before typing, skip this step. If
you want to underline a portion of text already typed, position the cursor at
the beginning of that portion.
3. Use E and E) to select STYLE, and press I RETURN or O.
4. Use 0 and E to select UNDERLINE.
5. Use to select CNT (continuous underlining) or WRD (word
underlining).
• Accelerator: Instead of (4) and (5), you may type "N".
6. Press DI N 1. The corresponding indicator is now on.
• Short cut: Instead of (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6), you may press [CODE, Liti to
switch the underline function CNTAVFID/OFF.
• If you select continuous underlining, all will be underlined, including blank
spaces. With word underlining, blank spaces are not underlined.
7. The text you now type or the text you scan by moving the cursor right is
underlined. If you move the cursor past the desired position, simply move
back to remove the underline. To move the cursor to the beginning or the end
of the line, + ( ) and ( ( ).
underline function OFF, or press tOODEJ +
• To undo underlining, position the cursorjust after the last underlined character,
z select the same option (CNT or WRD), and move the cursor to the left. Turn
the underline function OFF to stop removing underlining.
co
r-
z
220

Continuous Underline
Using the Underline is a way of making a Word,

the reader's eye. The Underline feature has a
Word Underline
Using the Underline is a way of making a Word,

the reader's eye. The Underline feature has a
Typing Expanded Text
STYLE CTR/RMF
BOLD OF.7
,. (ON)
UNDERLINE OFF (CNT) (WM))
ZXPAND OFF (ON)
SUPER. SUP. ON/CFE OFF (SUPER) (SUB)
The expand function is used only while typing. You cannot use it to reformat text
that has been typed.
1. Press IMENU to display the menu.
2. Use LC, and El to select STYLE, and press RETURN or R.
• Accelerator: instead of (2), you may type "S".
3. Use and 0 to select EXPAND.
4. Use ( (SPACE BAR) Ito turn the function ON.
• Accelerator: Instead of (3) and (4), you may type "E".
5. Press f RETURN J. The EXP indicator is now on.
6. The text you now type is expanded -- that is, a permanent space is auto-
matically inserted after each text character (See also "Permanent Space" on
page 136.)
expand function OFF.
• The permanent spaces inserted with the expand function cannot be removed
automatically. To undo the expand format, delete the permanent spaces one
by one using (BS.
221

COPY
Expand
This letter was typed on this new Work Organizer

to show you some of the many outstanding feats it can
perform.
Superscripts R
and CODE
Subscripts
CODE >
I
STYLE CTR/RMF
BOLD OFF (ON)
EXPAND OFF (ON)
SUPER'sus ON/Ore' OFF (SUPER) (SUB)
You may enter and print superscripts and subscripts.

• Characters in superscript and subscript are displayed on the same line as
normal characters, but only a half of the cursor appears (upper-half for
superscripts, and lower-half for subscripts).
• With daisy wheel and laser printers, superscripts and subscripts are printed
the same distance (1/12 inch) above orbelow the line, regardless of the current
line spacing. They are printed the same size as the normal text characters.
With dot matrix and inkjet printers, superscripts and subscripts are smaller
than normal text characters.
1. Move the cursor to the position where you want to type a superscript (or
subscript).
3. Use 0 and 0 to select STYLE, and press RETURN or C).
4. Use 05 and GB to select SUPER/SUB/OFF.
5. Use [(SPAcE13ARI) to until you get select SUPER or SUB.
6. To return to normal typing, repeat steps (2) to (5) to switch the function OFF.
C • To undo superscripts or subscripts, turn the function OFF and retype the
characters.
m
• Short cut: Instead of the above procedure, you may use (CODE) ÷ O and
+ O.
-
z
m 222

• Each pair of keys (gZar) + GI and ra5fel + CD ) cancels the other, and the
two pairs must always be used in combination.
Centering and Right Margin Flush Functions

(CTRIRMF)
Centering
CODE
STYLE CT iIRMF
RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH
The centering function is used to center headlines or titles between the margins.
1 Press NENU1 to display the menu.
2. Use E and (4) to select CTRIRMF, and press or
3. Use CD and CD to select CENTERING and press cliEnnor . The CTR indicator
shows up.
• Short cut: Instead of (I), (2), and (3), you may press
4. Type your text and press
• Pressing or + (Y.) switches back to the normal mode.
Left Margin Right Margin
Institute of Chemistry and Physics

100 Metro Street
New York, N.Y.
223

Right Margin Flush
CODE ‘R
0-
STYLE CTR/RMF
CENTERING
RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH
The right margin flush function is used to have the last character of a line exactly
on the right margin. This is used, for example, to type the date of a letter.
2. Use 0 and C) to select CTR/RMF, and press RE-TURN) or 1• '.
3. Use 0 and to select RIGHT MARGIN FLUSH and press ( RETURN ;. The RMF
indicator shows up.
• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press CODE) ÷
4. Type your text and press

• Pressing 1 A Et: or (+ E') + a switches back to the normal mode.
Right Margin
May 26, 1989
m
co
z
m 224

Calculator
.01
Using Your Machine like a Pocket Calculator

In the CALCULATOR mode, the screen looks like a pocket calculator and allows
for elementary arithmetics. The result can be transferred to the INPUT/EDIT screen
of the Create Document mode.
How to Start?
From the Main Menu

« MAIN MENU »
1. SCHEDULER/CALENDAR 6. ,
Type:.nnmbe± or move cursor and. press RETURFLT.:PrettlIENU for more'selections.
2. Move the cursor to 6. CALCULATOR using F, 0, CD, and 0, then press RETURN
The CALCULATOR screen appears.
Thu September 12 19.91 9:16AM
OFF 7 8 9
/- 4 5 6
1. SCHEDULER/C.
2. ADDRESSBOOK
C 1 2 3
3. SPREADSHEET AC1
4. CREATE DOCU.
5. LINE BY LIN CALCULATOR 0 ION
Press SPACE- b"enter. Prets 0 or CANCEL o finish..
225

From the Create Document Mode
Holvinolvo
CODE
SCALC
You may also display the CALCULATOR screen when you need to carry out
calculation while working on the INPUT/EDIT screen of the Create Document mode.
To do this, simply press :CODE] (CAW
• The CALCULATOR can be called up only during normal input. You cannot
call up the CALCULATOR when the help menu is displayed, when a function
like permanent backspace, a function of the menu, etc. is activated.
Calculating
1. Use the number keys 0 - O to type numbers. The number: is displayed
on the bottom line of the display. To correct the last digit, press IFT% and retype.
2. Type an operator (+, for example).
3. Type the second number.
4. To get the result, press CD or ['RETURN:,
• Instead of typing, you may also use 1, CI and CD to move the cursor to
an item on the display. Press [(SPACE BA to select the item. Press RETURN
to calculate.
Order of Calculation
Operations are carried out in the normal order of precedence: multiplication or
division first, then addition or subtraction.
Example 1: To calculate 1+2*3=7, use 0 0 G E
Example 2: To calculate (1+2)*3=9, use 0 aD EIR O CD E.
Sign
To change the sign of a number, selects after entering the number.
Example: To calculate 21-5)=-10, use CD O.
Maximum Length of Numbers and Precision

The maximum length of a number is eight digits. If you enter more digits, they will
be ignored.
12345678 or 0.1234567 are accepted.
123456789 is truncated to 12345678 (9 ignored).
Since the calculator truncates all numbers to eight digits, small errors may occur.
Example: If you enter 1/3*3, you obtain 0.9999999 instead of 1.
226

Storing a Constant
If you enter the same operation twice in a row, K appears on the screen and the
previous result is stored in a temporary memory. That result is automatically reused
if you omit to enter a number after an operation.
Example: CD (K appears and 5 is stored) CD (7 is displayed).
• If you enter the same operation more than twice in a row, K disappears and
reappears alternately.
Clearing
CO1 clears the last entered number or operation.
Example 1: 0 O 0 gives 4 (2 has been cleared).
Example 2: 0 T; a)gives 3 (+ has been cleared).
• To clear an operation and replace it with another, you may also simply enter
the second operation. When you enter two or more different operations in a
row, only the last operation is used.
Example: Oi g gives 3.
Aoj clears all operations and numbers.
Turning the CALCULATOR off CANCEL
CODE G
GO TO
To turn the CALCULATOR off, move the cursor to (oFF) and press (SPACE BAR)
You may also use ( CANCEL J, 0, or (cooE cou..c Cl ). You will be back to the
MAIN MENU or to the INPUT/EDIT screen of the Create Document mode, wherever
you were coming from.
If you were coming from the Create Document mode, pressing CODE GO TO
LID ) turns the CALCULATOR off and transfers the result of the calculation to
position of the text before you switched to Calculator.
227

228

Clock
The Time Clock

This machine is equipped with an internal time clock featuring an alarm. The CLOCK
screen shown below can be permanently displayed when the machine is not used.
The time is also displayed on the upper-right corner of some screens, like the MAIN
MENU, for example.
Turning the CLOCK ON

« MAIN MENU >>

1. SCHEDULER/CALENDAR 6 CALCULATOR
2. ADDRESSBOOK CLOCK:
Type trustberti 'ice' . RETURN' Press IMAM for more -selecti
3. Move the cursor to 7. CLOCK using 0, E, E, and 0, then press ( RETURN

The CLOCK screen appears.
!!)41 TIME SETTING ALARM SETTING
99r
&"; el
2:52 IP . RETURN.
229

Setting the Time
1. Use E and to select TIME SETTING and press (PETURN . The TIME SETTING
screen appears.
• Accelerator: Instead of (1), you may type "Tn.
12:16AM
<< TIME SETTING »
MONTH 1
DAY 1
YEAR 1990
TIME 12:14:00
O AM or PM AM
C) M/D/Y or D/M/Y M/D/Y
12Hr. or 24Hr. 12Hr.
Type Dumber. Press *tram - to..set
2. Use J and to move the cursor to an item that you wish to set and press
E
I ACESAR) or type a value (see table below).
• The date and time can be set until December 31, 2099.
3. When all items are set, press I to start the clock.
Time setting
Setting Selection Explanation
Month Type the month number (ex. 5 for May)
Day Type the day (ex. 12)
Year Type the year (ex. 1991)
Hour Type the hour
Minute Type the minutes
Second Type the seconds. The seconds are always reset to zero
when the TIME SETTING function is activated.
AM / PM AM This setting is available only when the hour mode is set to
PM 12Hr.
Select with
Date mode M / D / Y May first 1991 will be displayed as MAY 1, 1991
D/M/Y May first 1991 will be displayed as 1 MAY, 1991
Select with
Hour mode 12Hr PM1:00 will be displayed as PM 1:00
24Hr PM1:00 will be displayed as 13:00
Select with
Day of week Mon, Tue, This is automatically calculated according to the year,
Wed, Thu, month, and day.
Fri, Sat, Sun
230

Setting the Alarm
1. Use lJ and C to select ALARM SETTING and press (RETURN i. The ALARM
SETTING screen appears.
12:16AM
« ALARM SETTING >>
QFF 12:00 AM
Press SPACE ti!chan attting. ;Tress RETURN to al
2. Use E and a) to move the cursor to an item that you wish to set and press
or type a value (see table below).
3. When all items are set, press to display the CLOCK screen. If the
alarm is ON, the machine will beep every day at the time you set.
Alarm setting
Setting Selection Explanation
Switch ON Alarm will beep
OFF Alarm will not beep
Select with
Hour Type the hour
Minute Type the minutes
AM/PM AM This setting is available only when the hour mode is set to
PM 12Hr on the TIME SETTING screen.
Select with EISPACESAR))
Returning to the Main Menu

To return to the MAIN MENU from the CLOCK screen, use CD and CD to select EXIT
and press FOC
• Accelerator: You may also type "E".
• Short cut: You may also press •
231

0
r
0
0
232

Communication
The Communication Mode

In the Communication mode, you can transfer files between your unit and a personal
computer. You can also transfer files between two Brother Power Note units. You
are able to attach a cable between the two units to transfer files, or you can com-
municate with a personal computer or Power Note at a distant location by using
the telephone line and a modem. The most popular use of this feature is to exchange
messages and files with friends and obtain access to commercial data bases and
electronic mail services. The Communication mode solves most problems of
compatibility between your machine and other computers. You already know that
another computer is not able to read your data disks, and that your machine cannot
read another computer's data disks. When you use the Communication mode, the
data is converted at each end of the line to ensure automatic compatibility.
COMMUNICATIO
Before You Start
Purchase a Modem
In order to use the Communication mode by connecting your machine to a computer
through the telephone line, you need to connect a modem between your machine
and the telephone line. For details about compatible modems and connections,
see "Modem and Fax Adapter" on page 9.
• If you own a personal computer and want to use the Communication
mode for data transfer between the two machines, you do not need a
modem. Your computer must be equipped with an RS-232C connector,
and a communication program. Simply connect the RS-232C ports with
a NUL MODEM cable as explained on page 9. The procedures for data
transfer between the two machines are the same as when you use a
modem, except that you do not need to dial.
If you want to use Information Services...

Before trying to access a data base or electronic mail service, you must have
established an account with the desired service and received an ID name and pa
ssword.
233

How to Start?
« MAIN MENU »
2. ADDRESSBOOK CLOCK
3. SPREADSHEET riateRnsUrATION.....„.
;'.::711* ZjibUit:.curstir • az4 press RETURN.-,:kress lam fax,..,more selections
2. Move the cursor to 8. COMMUNICATION using the cursor keys and press RETURN J .
The COMMUNICATION screen shown appears.
I
« COMMUNICATION » KB:I 0:00:00

,
0
.•-411trtb-*e'rii'• b Wrr - 5V

• The COMMUNICATION screen does not show the time. Instead, it shows
the time elapsed from the moment you entered the COMMUNICATION mode
in the format "hourminute:second".
Communicating
A communication session involves those separate steps: setting up the commu-
nication parameters, dialing (or being dialed), and transmitting/receiving. When
you call an information service, you must also identify yourself with a "log in".
1. Setting up: Communicating through a modem is very similar to a telephone
conversation between two people. In order to make the conversation possible,
some rules must be observed. For example, both persons will speak the same
language and will agree to speak one at a time. When communicating through
modems, some parameters like baud rate and parity must have the same
setting at each end of the line.
234

When you subscribe to an information service, you receive a list of the settings
that you are supposed to use. If you use different settings, the host computer
will not adjust automatically, and communication will be impossible.
Before you try to communicate with a friend, simply agree on the settings that
you will use. For more details about the setting, see:
"Setting Up" on page 241.
2. Being dialed: This machine can be dialed only when the Terminal mode is
displayed on the screen. If you are working with your unit or if you are already
communicating with someone, your machine cannot be dialed.
3. Dialing: This machine performs automatic dialing. This means that you do
not have to manually dial a number on the phone but simply type it on the
screen. To make this procedure everleasier, you can select the phone number
from the current Address Book file.
A communication service can usually be dialed at any time. The same is not
always true when transferring a file to a friend's personal computer. Before
dialing a friend, call him by phone to make sure that his computer is ready.
For more details about dialing, see:
• "Dialing" on page 238
• When sending a file to a personal computer that is connected to your unit by
a NUL MODEM cable, dialing is not necessary.
4. Entering a log in: A log in contains data that allows an information service
to identify you. This machine allows you to enter and edit the log in data on
a separate screen in order to have it ready when you are requested to identify
yourself.
5. Transmitting/Receiving: Once you are connected, the text that you type is
transmitted and the text that is received is displayed on your screen.
Optionally, the text that is transmitted can be "echoed" back to your screen
for confirmation.
You can transmit the contents of a Create Document file or store the infor-
mation received in a memory file. For more details about reception and
transmission, see:
• "Sending a File" on page 244
• "Receiving a File" on page 246
FILE
From the Terminal mode, simply press (M) + ) to return to the MAIN
MENU.
235

The COMMUNICATION Screen
COMMUNICATION » VP:: 0:0 :0;
Enaating TTY terminal. Press MENU to use options.
The main mode of the COMMUNICATION screen is used to send and receive
messages. This is called the Terminal mode. You know that the machine is in the
Terminal mode when this message is displayed:
MikMEIMII
Emulating TTY terminal. Press MENU to use options.
To prepare your machine for receiving a call, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that the Terminal mode is displayed.
2. Type ATS0=1 and press ffirruliN ).
3. Wait until connection is established.
The Function Menu MENU
FILE
Press tolEN11) to display three main functions, use E and E to move the cursor to
the desired function, then CnErucIN or Q to display a sub menu. Use D and F. to
select a function on a sub menu, and CRETIMIN to execute the function. Accelerators
(bright characters) can be used to select and execute a function quickly. Short-cut
keys can be used to bypass the function menu. See table below for a complete
list of function.
- When the cursor is on EXIT, pressing produces a beep, and pressing
CE
switches to the MAIN MENU.
236

Function Menu of the COMMUNICATION screen
Function Sub-menu Short-cut Key Page
Menu
OPTIONS1 VIEW LAST PAGE (CODE + (PRES ( (ID ) 237

DIAL (CODE) + CD 238
LOG IN (cope + 240
SET UP No short cut 241
OPTIONS2 SEND ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL) No short cut 244
(FILE)
SEND ASCII FILE (XMODEM) No short cut 244
RECEIVE ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL) No short cut 246
RECEIVE ASCII FILE (XMODEM) No short cut 246
SEND TEXT FILE No short cut 244
RECEIVE TEXT FILES No short cut 246
EXIT No submenu + (FILE MENU 248
Scrolling the Display CODE

t
PAES
OPTIONS1 OPTIONS2(FILE) EXIT

:VIEW LAST PAGE
DIAL
LOG IN
SET UP
The screen displays the messages that you receive and the messages that you
send are echoed back. When the screen is full, the messages on the top of the
screen disappear and are stored in a buffer. The capacity of the buffer is one full
screen. When the buffer is full, the oldest information is automatically deleted to
make room for the new data. When there is information stored in the buffer, the
VIEW LAST PAGE option of the function menu allows you to quickly recall that infor-
mation on the screen. Proceed as follows:
1. Press (MENU to display the function menu.
2. Use CD and 0 to select OPTIONS) and press RouRN j or CD. The submenu
appears.
Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "1".
3. Use J and 0 to select VIEW LAST PAGE and press (:RETURN
Accelerator: Instead of (3) you may type "V".
Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press CODE PRE S)
237

Scrolling the screen interrupts the Terminal mode. To return to that mode, press
CANCEL )
Dialing A
CODE
OPTIONS]. OPTIONS2(FILE) EXIT

VTFW LAST PAGE
DIAL
LOG IN
SET UP
A dial command is made of two parts: a dialing mode specification (ATDT for tone
dialing, and ATDP for pulse dialing) which depends on your telephone, and a phone
number that may include hyphens for easy reading.
1. Press (mew) to display the function menu.
oilvoiNnviwoo
2. Use 0 and 0 to select OPTIONS1 and press REMRN or O. The submenu

appears.
3. Use F. and 0 to select DIAL and press ``RETURN`). These messages will appear:
Enter ,rabons number a.114 ;press . RETURN !te;k7execute...:

Use ATD7stor_ touch tone: dialing or ATDPfpr pulpe dialing:
DIAL COMMAND: ATDT

• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press r CODE) ÷
You may type the dial command or select it from the current Address Book.
Direct Typing of the Dial Command

1. Type the dial command (you may insert hyphens between the different parts
of the number to make it more easy to read) and press RETURN . Automatic
dialing starts.
• Ifyou do not know whether your phone is ATDT or ATDP, try either one, and
restart with the other option if the first did not work.
• The dialing command ATDT or ATDP, as well as the phone number, is stored
in the memory and will be automatically displayed the next time you enter the
dial mode.
238

• To edit the phone number, you may use (iiis , + rwORDour ((:§) ), and
(bow: + ruNEWT R) ) to delete, ( (1) ) to switch the insert
mode on/off, and E, (2) to move the cursor on the entry field. if you delete
the ATDT or ATDP command, do not forget to retype it.
Pressing ,cANCEL1 returns the machine to the Terminal mode without dialing.
Selecting the Phone Number

from the Address Book CODE G
GO TO
1. Instead of typing the phone number, you may press (cooE Go To) r) ).
The current Address Book file appears.
2. Use C) and CD to select the person or company that you want to call and press
[ RETURN J. The phone number appears on the entry field of the DIAL COM-
MAND and you may edit it as explained above. Press ( RETURN to start
automatic dialing.
• Pressing CANdEL when the Address Book file is displayed returns the system
to the dial input mode without selecting a number.
• The selection of a phone number using the Address Book file is possible only
if the file contains a column whose label starts with the string "TELEPHONE"
(all capitals). For example, "TELEPHONE NO" is valid while "Telephone" or
"telephone" are not. if a valid label is not found, this message will appear:
ADDRESSBOOK has no telephone number column.
If the Address Book file is empty, this message will appear:
ADDRESSBOOK has no data.
Dialing and Connection Problems

• After the connection is established, CONNECT appears on the Terminal mode
screen. If any other message appears (NO CARRIER, etc.), the line may be
busy or you may have entered a wrong telephone number. Check the number
and try dialing again.
if OK does not appear, or if o (zero) appears instead, when you type AT and
press(Ferufttf. in the terminalmode while the line is not connected, this means
that the modem does not return the messages. Type ATQ0V1 and press
. Check whether OK appears.
• If the receiveddata are notdisplayedcorrectly, check the settings (see "Setting
Up" on page 241). If the baud rate of your machine and the baud rate of the
host machine do not match, data cannot be displayed correctly.
239

When you want to terminate a communication while you are connected, simply
return to the MAIN MENU (see "Returning to the MAIN MENU" on page 248).
With some types of modem, or with some settings of the modem switches,
communication cannot be interrupted that way. In that case, simply turn off
the power of the modem.
Log in CODE
L IND
OPTIONS2(FILE) EXIT
VIEW LAST PAGE
: DIAL
LOG IN
SET UP
With most information services, you are requested to enter an ID name and a
password just after being connected. You can simplify that step by preparing this
i
log in" information before dialing. The log in will be stored in the memory.
1. Press NM) to display the function menu.
2. Use R. and g) to select OPTIONS1 and press or J. The submenu
v
appears.
I

3. Use CD and Q to select LOG IN and press [RETURN': . The log in input screen
appears.
LOG IN KB:I 0:00:00
Type: 'TD or password: a log in. Press RETUEN'tO,eXecUte or TEMP to store.

ID/PASSWORD
LINE 1:
LINE 2:
LINE 3:
LINE 4:

• Short cut: Instead of (1), (2), and (3), you may press ram + .
4. Type the log in data according to the requirements of the service that you want
to use. For example, type your user name on the first line, and your password
on the second line. Four lines of 20 characters each are available. Use C3
and to change lines.
240

5. Press RETURN I to store the data into the memory and start transmitting the
log in, or press CANCEL to abandon the data, restore the old one and return
to the terminal mode.
6. If you have pressed RETURN „ the first line is transmitted and this message
appears:
Executing log in. Press SPACE to continue. Press CANCEL to abort.
7. Press (SPACE BAR) to transmit the second line. Repeat this step to transmit
each of the next lines. The lines are displayed one by one and the machine
waits before each line until you press ( (SPACE BAR) , The line is transmitted
when you press , (SPACE BAR) To cancel the transmission, press ; CANCEL
Setting Up
OPTIONS. 0PTI0NS2FILEI EXIT

VIEW LAST PAGE
DIAL
LOG IN
SET UP
The SET UP screen allows for several settings. You do not have to completely
understand these settings in order to communicate. If you communicate with an
information service, set the parameters as specified by the information service. If
you communicate with a friend using the same machine, simply use the default
settings. If you communicate with a friend using a different machine, conform with
his settings.
To set up the machine, proceed as follows:
1. On the COMMUNICATION screen, press (MENUS to display the function menu.
2. Use (42.- and to select OPTIONS1 and press ( RETURN or C. The submenu
appears.
3. Use IA and 1, 2 to select SET UP and press RETURN J. The SET UP screen
appears.
241

SET UP
BAUD RATE
v1200
PARITY NO
DATA BITS 8
STOP BITS 1
XON/XOFF CONTROL ON
SIGNAL LINE CONTROL NONE
LOCAL ECHO OFF
AUTO LINEFEED OFF
AUTO LINEFEED (SEND) ON
CODE TABLE 8BIT
Presit SPACE to change se'tt'ing Press RETURN to finish.

4. On the SET UP screen, use C) and T.r , to select a parameter, ( (SPACEBAR) to
select the setting, and press (RErunN) to return to the COMMUNICATION
screen. The settings are stored in the memory.
• Ti return to the COMMUNICATION screen without saving the
setting, press
(-CANCEL). The old settings will be restored.
BAUD RATE(300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600)
This parameter determines the transmission speed in bits per second. For
TAM
example, if you are transmitting 8-bit characters with a single stop and start
bit, each character will use 10 bits. If you select the baud rate 1200, the
machine will, in principle, transmit about 120 characters per second (or about
a
one page of 1200 characters in ten seconds). Since the data has to be checked
for transmission errors, and eventually echoed back, the overall transmission
speed is usually lower than this figure. In general, increasing the baud rate
also increases the risk of transmission errors, specially on noisy lines.
• PARITY (NO, ODD, EVEN, SPACE, MARK)
This determines how the bits of each characters are checked for transmission
errors.
This machine does not performs any parity check during reception.
NO: No parity bit is added to the characters.
EVEN: The machine counts the number of non zero bits in a character. If this
number is even, the parity bit is set to zero, and to one otherwise. This way,
all "words" (characters + parity bit) will have an even number of non zero bits.
The receiving unit must have the same parity setting and expects only words
with even number of non zero bits. When this number is odd, the receiving
machine knows that something is wrong (for example, one bit has-been spoiled
by noises on the line).
000: This is the opposite of the EVEN parity. A parity bit is set so that the total
number of non zero bits is odd.
SPACE: (Possible only when DATA BITS=7). The parity bit is always zero.
MARK: (Possible only when DATA BITS=7). The parity bit is always one.
242

• DATA BITS (7, 8)
This determines how many bits are necessary to encode the characters.
Standard ASCII characters use seven bits. Accented letters and other special
characters need eight bits.
• STOP BITS (1, 2)
Each word must be separated from the next one with a special bit called "stop
bit". This parameter specifies the length of the stop bit (1=--single, 2,-double).
• XON/XOFF CONTROL (ON, OFF)
This parameter determines whether or not to allow flow control by the X
parameter. If this control is allowed, an XOFF code (13hex) will be transmitted
by the receiving machine when the free area in the reception buffer is less
than 25%. As the data is processed and removed from the buffer, the free
area increases. When the free area becomes greater than 75 %, the receiving
machine sends an XON code (11hex) to make the other machine resume data
transmission. When the transmitting machine receives an XOFF code, it
enters a state in which it can transmit only XON/XOFF codes. This state is
terminated upon reception of an XON code. This is valid only during data
transmission other than file transfer using XMODEM protocol. Regardless of
the flow control method, data transmission is possible only when the control
signal lines DSR and CTS are active.
SIGNAL LINE CONTROL (NONE, DTR, RTS, DTR&RTS)
This parameter determines whether or not to allow flow control by the control
lines DTR and/or RTS. The selected line(s) will allow transmission only when
active. If NONE is selected, both lines are maintained active.
LOCAL ECHO (ON, OFF)
When local echo is on, transmitted data is displayed on your screen.
AUTO LINEFEED (ON, OFF)
This parameter determines the effect of a received carriage return code
(0Dhex) on the cursor. If you select ON, a carriage return will automatically
add a line feed. Set this to OFF if the received data is displayed with double
line spacing. Set it to ON if the received data is displayed on the same line,
overwriting the previous message.
AUTO LINEFEED SEND (ON, OFF)
This parameter determines what is transmitted when you press the RET‘0O
key.
Pressed key - AUTO LINEFEED ON AUTO LINEFEED OFF
(lennot) CR,LF CR
LOW + EIRTM1 CR CR,LF
243

• CODE TABLE (7BIT, MIT)
This parameter determines the character code table used for operations other
than text file transfer. In general, the 7-bit table is compatible with the 7-bit
table of Brother HR Series printer. The 8-bit table is compatible with the IBM
Extended table. For details see "Character Code Table" on page 249.
Sending a File
OPTIONSI OPTIONS2(FILE) EXIT

SEND ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL)
SEND ASCII FILE (XMODEM)
RECEIVE ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL)
RECEIVE ASCII FILE (XMODEM)
SEND TEXT FILE
RECEIVE TEXT FILE
OPTIONS]. OPTIONS2IFILE) EXIT

alimimim

SEND ASCII FILE (XMODEN)
SEND TEXT FILE
RECEIVE TEXT FILE
OPTIONSI OPTIONS2(FILE) EXIT

RECEIVE ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL} 4
SEND 1EXT''FILE '
RECEIVE TEXT FILE
• The machine can transmit Create Document files stored in the memory. If
you want to transmit a file that is stored on a disk, first load the file into the
memory. For details, see "Transferring a File from Disk to Memory" on page
209.
Before sending a file, you must be connected (your machine has been dialed or
you have dialed another machine, and if necessary, entered the log in data). If you
are sending to a personal computer or Power Note and are connected directly by
a NUL MODEM cable, you are automatically connected and no dialing is necessary.
You must also specify that you are going to send a file. With an electronic mail box
service, this is usually done by selection on an option menu. If you are commu-
nicating with a friend, just tell him that you are going to send a file (type the message
and press (RETURN ). This will give him time to prepare his machine for receiving
your file. Verify that both the sending and receiving units are "set-up" to use the
same parameters.
1. On the COMMUNICATION screen, press ,MENU' to display the function menu.
2. Use CD and[;] to select OPTIONS2(FILE) and press ( RETURN or O. The submenu
appears.
244

3. Use i and C to select SEND ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL), SEND ASCII FILE (XMO-
DEM), or SEND TEXT FILE and press ( RETURN The MEMORY INDEX appears.
• If you select SEND ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL) or SEND ASCII FILE (XMODEM), your
text file will be converted into a standard ASCII file. Attributes and most of
the format will be removed from the data. You must select one of these options
if the receiving machine is not the same as yours (Power Note). Select NO
PROTOCOL or XMODEM according to the parameter setting of the receiving
system.
If you select SEND TEXT FILE, the format of your text file will be preserved.
However, this works only if the receiving machine is identical to yours. With
this option, the protocol is automatically set to XMODEM.
• if there is no text file in the memory, this message will appear:
No files to send.
4. Select a file with the cursor keys and press ( RETURN ) to start transmission.
During transmission using NO PROTOCOL, the transmitted text as well as the
reception errors are echoed back as determined by the settings. The amount of
data already transmitted will be displayed in Kbytes.
During transmission using the XMODEM protocol, the receiving machine checks the
data by blocks of 128 bytes. When an error occurs, the receiving machine sends
a retransmission request and your machine sends the same block again. The
number of transmitted bytes as well as the number of retrials are displayed on the
screen.
• To cancel transmission, press (CANCE.L When using the XMODEM protocol,
transmission is also aborted if the ( CANCEL key is pressed on the receiving
machine. This key is usually the Escape key on a personal computer.
245

Receiving a File
OPTIONS -OPTIONS2(FILE) EXIT

SEND ASCII FILE ( NO PROTOCOL)
SEND ASCII FILE ( MODEM)
RECEIVE Asql 1,14 tntcavcot4L:,..
;.RECEIVE ASCII FILE (XMODEM)
SEND TEXT FILE
RECEIVE TEXT FILE
OP T IONS 1 OPTIONS? (FILE)._ EXIT

SEND ASCII FILE O(MODEM)
RECEIVE RECII,EUE-DMEENLii.x.i.
SEND TEXT FILE
RECEIVE TEXT FILE
OPTIONS) OPTIONS? AFTLE ) EXIT

SEND TEXT FILE
• RECEIVE TEXT FILE
MA2MIM
A received file is stored in the machine memory. Make sure that you have
enough free space in memory. If necessary, transfer your files on a disk and
delete them from the memory. For details, see "Transferring a File from
Memory to Disk" onpage 202 and "Deleting All Files in Memory" on page 203.
Before receiving a file, you must be connected (your machine has been dialed or
you have dialed another machine, and if necessary, entered the log in data). If you
are receiving from a personal computer or Power Note and are connected by a
NUL MODEM cable, you are automatically connected and no dialing is necessary.
You must also specify that you are going to receive a file. With an electronic mail
box service, this is usually done by selection on an option menu. If you are com-
municating with a friend, just tell him that you want a file (type the message and
press (RETURN )). This will give him time to prepare his machine for sending a file.
Verify that both the sending and receiving units are "set-up" to use the same
parameters.
1. On the COMMUNICATION screen, press to display the function menu.
2. Use El) and E to select OPTIONS2(FILE) and press orb. The submenu
appears.
Accelerator: Instead of (2), you may type "2".
3. Use F and to select RECEIVE ASCII FILE (NO. PROTOCOL), RECEIVE ASCII FILE
(XMODEM), or RECEIVE TEXT FILE and press #1,1— You are asked to enter
a file name.
246

• If you select RECEIVE ASCII FILE (NO PROTOCOL) or RECEIVE ASCII FILE (XMODEM),
the received ASCII file will be converted into a text file. The layout of the
converted text file will be quite primitive but you are free to improve it later
using the Create Document mode. You must select one of these options if
the transmitting machine is not the same as yours (Power Note). Select NO
PROTOCOL or XMODEM according to the parameter settings of the transmitting
system.
• If you select RECEIVE TEXT FILE, the file will be stored without conversion. The
format of the transmitted file will be preserved. However, this works only if
the transmitting machine is identical to yours. With this option, the protocol
is automatically set to XMODEM.
• If there is less than three Kbytes of free space in the memory, this message
will appear:
Not enough memory remaining.
4. Type the file name under which the received file has to be stored in the memory
and press RETuRN to start receiving. You may also press (CANCEL during
file name input to cancel the operation and return to the COMMUNICATION
screen.
During reception using NO PROTOCOL, the amount of data already received will be
displayed in Kbytes.
During reception using the XMODEM protocol, your machine checks the data by
blocks of 128 bytes. When an error occurs, your machine sends a retransmission
request and the same block is received again. The number of received bytes as
well as the number of retrials are displayed on the screen.
• To cancel reception, press CANCEL ) or t + (FILE ( MENU) ), according to
the message on the bottom of the screen. When using the XMODEMprotocol,
reception is also aborted if the cANcEL key is pressed on the transmitting
machine.
• Pressing -FEE( ) during reception of an ASCII file displays this
message:
Press RETURN to close and save, CODE+D to delete.
• If the memory becomes full during reception of an ASCII file, this message
will appear:
Memory full. Press RETURN to close and save, CODE+D to delete.
247

In both cases, if you press inouRN), the portion of the file that has been
received will be converted into a text file and saved under the file name that
you specified. If you press (cone' 0, the file will be deleted.
Returning to the Main Menu s CODE MENU
J FILE
OPTION' OPTION2(FILE)
1. To return to the MAIN MENU, press (MENU)

2. Use E and 0 to select EXIT and press f RETtnifil. This message will appear:
Disconnecting? Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).

M*EliniM

3. Press figninif J to return to the MAIN MENU, or :E1-:) to stay in the Terminal
mode.
248

Character Code Table
8-bit Code Table
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ABCDE F
0 NUL DLE SP 0@ P E p t 4. a
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A O a d 0 cc P ±
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r TI C r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s C' C'1 g ' 7C
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t a a[ 7
r r
5 ENO NAK % 5 E U e u li I ff+, ff) a

6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v aK P ÷
7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w g gi T
8 BS 'CAN ( 8 H X h x C y 6 4:13, °
9 HT EM ) 9 l Y i y e O 0
A LF SUB * : J Z i z DO O .
B VT ESC + ; K [ k { T O `i 5 \1-
C FF FS , < L \ I I C£ 1
' 00
D CR GS , - = M ] m 1 WY i 9 2
E SO RS . > NTn E A E
F SI US / ? O o DEL A
• Codes on grey background are ASCII controls. They can be input from the
keyboard and transmitted in the terminal mode. See "Transmitting Control
Codes" page 251 for a list of input keys. Code 15HEX (NAK) transmits the
character §.
• Any character of the above table can be received and most of them will be
displayed correctly. The only exceptions are a, A, 9, 1, and 6, which are dis-
played without diacriticals. Codes without a character are displayed as spaces.
• Codes above 7FHEX cannot be transmitted, except boxed characters like O.
To input such characters, use the dead keys of KB:l.
249

7-bit Code Table
0 1 2 j 3 4 5 6 j
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ' p
1 SOH DCI ! 1 AQa q
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 CS c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 DT d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB. ' 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 r-. H X h x
ouvoiNnW103
9 H EM ) 9 l Y i y
A LF , SUB * • J Z j z
B VT ESC + . K [ k 1/4
C FF FS' , < L ± I 1/2
D CR GS - = M ] m ¶
E SO RS . > N 2 n §
F SI US / ? O o DEL
• Codes on grey background are ASCII controls. They can be input from the
keyboard and transmitted in the terminal mode. See "Transmitting Control
Codes" page 251 for a list of input keys.
• Characters 1, A, `, {, }, -, and ' of KB:I and character of KB:II cannot be
transmitted.
• Character ¶ can be received and displayed but cannot be transmitted.
250

Transmitting Control Codes
The following keys can be used in the terminal mode to transmit ASCII control
codes.
Keys Code ASCII Control

(Hexadecimal) Name
CODE + SHIFT) + K)' 00 NUL
(coDE) + ,SHIFT; + Z14/ . 01 SOH
(code + (SHIFT) +• 02 STX
(CODE) + (SHIFT i + K. ! 03 ETX
(cope + (SHIFT) + Ki l 04 EOT
(cooE)+ (sHIFT) + W 05 ENQ
CODE, + ((SHIFT + E 06 ACK
cODE) + SHIFT j + (0 ! 07 BEL
CODE + (SHIFT) 4- CD 08 BS
CODE' + SHIFT) + I 09 HT
(coDE + (sH )+ O OA LF
(000e(+ sHin-) + 0 0B VT
(CODE, + (SHIFT) + O 0C FF
(:CODE) + SSHIFT + (m OD CR
(rope + MFT,
si + (WO OE SO
looDE; + (sHiFT ) + K: ai OF SI
=DEJ + SHIFT + E1 ) 10 DLE
, + sli Co) 11 DC1(XON)
CODE + +! 12 DC2
+ Fr: 0 13 DC3(XOFF)
( + FT + W
!.' 14 DC4
+ 1 15 NAK
CD 16 SYN
(Continued)
251

Keys Code ASCII Control
(Hexadecimal) Name
(Com + (sin. + w; 17 ETB
ICODE1 + (SHIFT) + x, 18 CAN
(ooDEi +(SHIFT) + Er , 19 EM
+ (SHIFT) + 0 1A SUB
[core . + ,sHIFT) + 0 1B ESC
LOCOE + (smiff +0 1C FS
(coDE) + istirrrj + 0 1D GS
(coDE) + SHIFT + 0 1E RS
foceE , + + CD 1F US
ig 08 BS
[TAR)
INMfflffliM
09 HT
(SPACE SAM 20 SPACE
(wog) + g) 7F DEL
REWRN AUTO LF CR+LF

(SEND) ON:
0D+0A
AUTO LF CR
(SEND) OFF:
OD
CODE, + [RETURN J AUTO LF CR

(SEND) ON: OD
AUTO LF CR+LF
(SEND) OFF:
0D+0A
252

Fax
The FAX Mode

In the FAX mode, your machine is able to send a text to a receiving fax machine.
With a normal fax machine, you can send and receive printed information. With
the FAX mode of this machine, you can send the contents of a document file directly
through the telephone line. You do not need to print the document first and you
do not need to have a fax machine. All you need is to connect the optional
pocket-size Fax Adapter between your machine and a telephone line. For details
about that optional adapter and its connections, see "Modem and Fax Adapter" on
page 9.
Before You Start

Only a text file that is currently stored in the memory can be transmitted. If the file
is on disk, first load it into the memory. For details, see "Transferring a File from
Disk to Memory" on page 209.
The Address Book file which is currently stored in the memory can be used for easy
selection of the fax number. Again, if the desired file is stored on disk, you should
first load it into the memory. For details, see "Loading a File from a Disk" on page
73.
How to Start?
« MAIN MENU >>

4. CREATE DOCUMENT J-'
5. LINE BY LINE O. DISK APPLICATION
umber pt.'may*'ears erpte s 11Ftlq:' 764Iettron't • ;
2. Move the cursor to 9. FAX using the cursor keys and press (`RETURN, . The
MEMORY INDEX screen appears and you can see the list of the text files
which are currently stored in the memory.
253

« MEMORY INDEX » MEMORY:XXXF SHIFT
LETTERI: (XX.X) TEXT: (XX.X) TEXT: (XX.X)
Select a file and press RETURN.
3. Use the cursor keys and, if necessary, ECODE (PRE 8, ( crlf ) and fooDE,
NEXT sj ( ) to select the text file and press ( RETURW. The SEND A FAX
screen appears.
« SEND A FAX » KB:X 1:4.9A_M
FILE NAME TO SEND: XXXXXXXX
FAX NUMBER
DIAL MODE (TONE/PULSE) TONE
TRANSMITTER ID 3
.
.:TreWtOTOto'4ispI4ii-ADDRESSBOOK. Preto RETURN to -16iid.
Sending the File

The SEND A FAX screen displays the name of the selected file and allows you to
enter the fax number of the recipient and to set some transmission parameters.
You can directly type the fax number or jump to the display of the current Address
Book file and select the number from there.
-n 1. Enter the fax number. For details see "Entering the Fax Number" on page
256.
2. If necessary, set the dial mode (tone or pulse) and type your transmitter ID.
For details, see "Dial Mode" on page 257 and "Transmitter ID" on page 258.
3. After setting the machine and entering the fax number, use CD and 0 to move
the cursor to the fax number entry field and press ( RETURN 1. The machine will
ask you to confirm.
Press RETURN to execute. Press CANCEL to cancel.
4. Press RETURN) again to send the fax. The machine will automatically dial the
fax number and transmit the file. The page number of the page being trans-
mitted will appear on the screen.
SENDING PAGE : XXX
254

When the transmission is complete, this message will appear:
TRANSMISSION COMPLETED TOTAL PAGES : XXX
For more details about what can happen during transmission, see "Trans-
mission Problems" on page 258.
• The printout of a file and the fax copy that is received at the end of the line
may slightly differ. For details, see "Printout vs Fax Copy" on page 259.
FILE
1. If the transmission is successful, this message will appear:
Fax communication completed. Press FILE to exit.
2. Press i + ) or to return to the MAIN MENU.
255

The SEND A FAX Screen
<< SEND A FAX >> KB :X 1:48Am
FILE NAME TO SEND: XXXXXXXX
FAX NUMBER
[L. 1
DIAL MODE (TONE/PULSE) TONE
TRANSMITTER ID
todi.#14iy ADDRESSBOOK.- Pkets RETURN to send.
The SEND A FAX screen displays the name of the file which you selected from the
MEMORY INDEX (FILE NAME TO SEND), an entry field for the fax number (FAX
NUMBER), a setup area for the DIAL MODE, and an entry field for the TRANSMITTER ID.
• FILE NAME TO SEND: The file name is displayed to remind you of the name of
the file that you are going to send. You cannot change the file name on this
screen. If you want to change the file name, press €CANCEL to return to the
MEMORY INDEX and select another file.
FAX NUMBER: There are two methods for entering the fax number: direct input,
or selection from the ADDRESS BOOK file.
DIAL MODE: Depending on your telephone, there are two methods of dialing,
tone and pulses. You must set your machine accordingly, otherwise, trans-
mission is impossible. If you do not know which dialing mode is used on your
-n telephone, you may try the modes one by one.
The setting for the dial mode will remain in the memory.
TRANSMITTER ID: This is an optional entry. It is automatically printed on the
top of the fax copies to allow the recipient to identify you. The setting for the
dial mode will remain in the memory.
Entering the Fax Number
Direct typing
1. On the SEND A FAX screen, use CD and CD to move the cursor to the entry
field for FAX NUMBER.
2. Type the fax number.
A tax number is basically made of digits (0-9). You may also use other characters
in addition to the digits. These characters and their function are listed below:
256

Characters used for auto dialing
Characters Function
The actual fax number.
Parentheses and hyphens: make the number easier to
read and are ignored during auto dialing.
Each comma inserts a two-second pause. This is useful
when the auto dialing pace is too fast.
Produces a tone while dialing.
Waits for a second dial tone (insert this character
between the international call number and the rest of the
fax number to allow for connection).
Specify pulse or tone dial mode. Enter one of these
characters before the fax number to override the dial
mode setting of the FAX SET UP screen.
Using the Address Book File

1 On the SEND A FAX screen, use j and El to move the cursor to the entry
field for FAX NUMBER.
2. Press CODE) + GOTO ( El ). The Address Book file is displayed.
• If the Address Book file is empty, this message appears:
ADDRESSBOOK has no data.
If the Address Book fife has no FAX NUMBER label (the label must start with
the three characters "FAX"; thenext characters can be anything), this message
appears:
ADDRESSBOOK has no FAX number column.
3. Use 0 and 0 to select the recipient.

4. Press ( RETURN to confirm the selection and return to the SEND A FAX screen.
The fax number is now displayed in front of FAX NUMBER.
Dial Mode
The dial mode has to be entered only when you are transmitting for the first time,
or when you are transmitting from another telephone. The dial mode will be kept
in the memory until you change it.
257

1. On the SEND A FAX screen, use E and to move the cursor to the DIAL
MODE setup area.
2. Press (SPACE BAR) to select TONE or PULSE.
Transmitter ID
The transmitter ID is optional. If you enter a transmitter ID, it will be kept in the
memory until you change it.
1. On the SEND A FAX screen, use 0 and to move the cursor to the
TRANSMITTER ID entry field.
2. Type your name, the name of your company, etc. (up to 20 characters).
Transmission Problems
• If the line is busy, the machine will automatically retry twice at intervals of three
minutes (for a total of three dialing). This message will appear:
Awaiting redial.
Line is busy.
• If transmission fails, the machine will display one of these messages:
Fax adapter does not exist.
Line is busy.
No response from remote fax.
The telephone circuit is disconnected.
Line was interrupted.
Fax communication error.
Correct and retry.

If a power failure occurs, the next time you switch the power on, this message
will appear:
Last fax transfer failed.
258

Printout vs Fax Copy
if you compare a fax copy with the printout of the same file, you will notice some
differences in pitch and line spacing: the fax copy will usually be slightly more
compact.
The following table shows the list of codes that can be transmitted. Please note
that dead characters are not supported.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SPOOF) ' p
1 1 AOa q
2 " 2 BR b r
3 # 3CS C s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 %5 E ti e u
6 & 6 FV f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 1 ( 8 HXh x
9 ) 9 I Y * y
A * : J Z ' z
B + • K I k {
C < L ‘ I I
D - =M ] m )
E . >N " n
F / ?O_o
259

In
1:•
x
260

Disk Application
The Disk Application Mode
The last option on the MAIN MENU, DISK APPLICATION is used for running programs
that are available on disk. A disk containing the TETRIS game and Spreasheet
Templates comes with your machine. Although the TETRIS program and the
Spreadsheet Templates are protected against accidental deletion, it is a good idea
to make a backup copy of this disk (see "Copying a Disk (Disk Back-Up)" on page
206).
What is the TETRIS Game?

Pieces made of four small squares fall one by one from the top of the screen into
an empty pit. While a piece is falling, you can move it to the right or to the left and
rotate it so that the piece fills exactly the gaps at the bottom of the pit. The pieces
come in seven different shapes (see illustration below). When one row of the pit
is filled without gaps, it is deleted. This challenging game of speed and maneuvering
consists of deleting as many lines as possible. As the lines with gaps build up at
the bottom of the pit, you have less time to adjust the position of the falling piece.
The game ends when the pit is filled with such lines.
MEM II NM ME •
• II MOM MN NM EMI
How to start?
« MAIN MENU >>

5. LINE BY LINE 11.--DISKAPPLICATION
Type Press MENU for more selections.

miter or moue cursor and press RETURN
261

2. Insert the TETRIS disk.
3. Move the cursor to 0. DISK APPLICATION using E, l , E, and l , then press
RETURN . This message will appear:
Ali memory files must be saved on disk before using DISK

APPLICATION.
Press CODE+S to save files, CODE+D to delete files.

4. Since the game makes use of all the memory, you must transfer all your files
to the disk or delete them before the game is loaded. Press (coDE1 + to
save the files, or CODE C) to delete them. You may also press ( CANCEL ) to
return to the MAIN MENU.
• The files can be saved on the TETRIS disk or on a data disk. To save the
files on a data disk, insert the desired disk before pressing icor* +
To delete the files...

• If you do not want to save your files (because you have already saved them,
for example), simply press E + D. This message will appear:
• If you press , all the files are deleted. This includes the Create
Document, Address Book, and Scheduler/Calendar files, as well as the
User Dictionary and Abbreviated Phrase files.
• If you press , the machine returns to the normal MAIN MENU, and
you can select another mode.
To save the files...

• Press cobEl ÷ M. The MEMORY INDEX displays Create Document, Address
NOLIVOIlddV NSICI
Book, and Scheduler/Calendar files currently in the memory. The first file that
is going to be saved is displayed in reverse color and a message asks you to
wait:
Saving the file....please wait.
• After the file has been saved, the machine automatically starts saving the next
file. When all files displayed on the MEMORY INDEX have been saved, the
machine starts saving files that are not displayed on the MEMORY INDEX,
such as the USER DICTIONARY, etc. A message like this asks you to wait:
262

Saving user dictionary....please wait.
• If a file with exactly the same file name already exists on the disk, this message
appears:
• If you press [ RETURN the file is saved, overwriting the old file on the disk. If
you press t CEL , you are requested to enter a new file name:

FILENAME:2
• If you type a file name and press ( RETURN ), the file is saved under that file
name. If you press , this message will appear:
Press RETURN to delete current file, CANCEL to exit.
• If you press (RETURN , the file will not be saved. If you press ( CANCEL , the
machine returns to the MAIN MENU.
After the files are saved or deleted...

After your files have been saved or deleted, the DISK APPLICATION screen
appears:
<< DISK APPLICATION » REMAIN:XXX.XK 2:18AM
innziL'ZS$4.'
1. Press to display the TETRIS logo, or to return to the MAIN

MENU.
263

brother TETRIS
2. A Copyright Notice screen comes after the logo, then the TETRIS SET UP
screen appears. (To get to that screen faster, you may press ( (SPACEBAR) ]
while the logo is being displayed.)
Setting the LEVEL and HEIGHT
LEVEL HEIGHT
2 4 024
561 7 8 9 7 10 (<
Select LEVEL and HEIGHT by using J or L key.
Press RETURN to start.

isb
LEVEL and HEIGHT determine the difficulty of the game.

The level sets the speed at which the pieces fall from the top of the screen. You
can select values from 0 (slow) to 9 (fast).
The height sets the number of rows at the bottom of the pit that are already randomly
filled. Normally, you will start with an empty pit (0). If you select 10 (maximum),
you will start the game with ten rows with gaps at the bottom of the pit. You may
NOILVOIlddV NSICI
challenge someone else with the same configuration which you last played by
selecting "«" on the HEIGHT menu. This will give you the same block placement
from the previous case.
1. To set the LEVEL, use 0 to increase or 0 to decrease. (D can also be used
to increase the LEVEL while playing, but you cannot decrease the LEVEL while
playing).
2. When the LEVEL is set, press or ) to start setting the
HEIGHT.
3. To set the HEIGHT, use d to increase or 0 to decrease.
4. Press or (ISPACEPAR)) to start playing. The TETRIS screen appears.
264

Playing
Increase Level
O Next orgoff
NEXT
HI-SCORE :
SCORE :
LINES :
0
.C= E=.
[ am]
LEVEL : 0
Sound on/off Drop
1. To move a falling piece to the left, use 2 or (i). To move it to the right, use
a-.J
. or To rotate it, use M1 or 0.
2. The faster a piece falls, the more points you get when a row is deleted. You
can always drop the piece by pressing ilemE 0, or I when you are
sure it is aligned.
3. When a game is over, the machine asks if you want to start again:
Do you want to play again?

Press RETURN(yes) or CANCEL(no).
4. Press :RETURNi,, to reset and play again, or ( CANCEL o return to the MAIN
DISK APPLICATION
MENU.
• The difficulty of the game (LEVEL) will automatically increase as the game
progresses depending on the number of lines deleted. The game will jump
from LEVEL 0 to LEVEL 1 after deleting 11 lines, then it willjump from LEVEL 1 to
LEVEL 2 after deleting 22 lines. The LEVEL will keep jumping up until reaching
LEVEL 9.
265

The Indicators
Indicator Meaning
HI-SCORE Indicates the highest score of a series of games.
SCORE Indicates the score for the current game.
LINES Indicates the number of deleted lines.
LEVEL Indicates the selected LEVEL while playing
Indicates that the sound is on (this can be switched off).
NEXT Indicates the shape of the next piece (this can be switched off).
Other Options
Other options are available:
• LLI): to increase the LEVEL while playing (there is no key to decrease the LEVEL
while playing).
• 1 : to switch the display of the NEXT piece on/off.
• T: to turn the sound on/off.
• : to switch to the Create Document mode INPUT/EDIT screen. This is
useful when you do not want to be caught playing at a time you should be
working. Although the INPUT/EDIT screen is displayed, no input is actually
possible.
From the INPUT/EDIT screen, you may press [MENU) again to return to your
game, or to display the MAIN MENU.
How to Finish MENU
FILE
NOIIVOnde ASICI
To stop playing at any time and return to the MAIN MENU, press [MENU), then
If you press J again instead of (CANCEL , the game restarts where
you left it.
266

Appendix
Error Messages
Error Message Cause Remedy

or Indicator
BATTERY The rechargeable battery is Recharge as soon as possi-
low. ble.
Battery low. Can't The rechargeable battery is You can still use the
use Disk Drive. low. machine for a while, but the
disk drive cannot be
accessed. Recharge as
soon as possible.
Check disk. Malfunction of the disk or Consult your dealer.
disk drive.
Disk is write pro- You are using a write- Use another disk or disen-
tected. Insert protected disk. gage the protection.
another and press
RETURN.
Incorrect disk. The selected file cannot be Press =cANCELJ or reinsert
Insert another and found on the inserted disk the correct disk and press
press RETURN. (you changed the disk so [RETURN .
that the DISK INDEX
screen and the inserted disk
do not match).
Insert disk and The disk is not inserted Insert the disk and press
press RETURN. when you start a read oper- [ .
ation, or the disk is removed In the future, please avoid
during read or write removing or inserting a disk
operation (a message was while prompted to wait.
telling you to wait).
Memory full. You attempted an operation Delete some of the file to
that would require more make more free room.
APPENDIX
memory than the total limit

of 32 kilobytes.
(continued)
267

Error Message Cause Remedy
or indicator
MemLoss The lithium battery is low. Save all your files on disk
and change the lithium bat-
tery as soon as possible.
Ram down. Malfunction detected in your Consult your dealer immedi-
machine's Random Access ately.
Memory.
Rom down. Malfunction detected in your Consult your dealer immedi-
machine's Read Only ately.
Memory.
Unidentified disk Defective disk. Consult your dealer.
error.
Insert another and
press RETURN.
You attempted to copy an Initialize the disk.
uninitialized source disk. (This will erase any files
previously stored on the
disk.)
15
m
z
268

Troubleshooting Chart
Your unit has been precision-manufactured to give you years of trouble-free use.
In the rare case that trouble does happen, you will probably be able to find the
solution in the table below. If you cannot, please do not attempt to repair the
machine yourself. Instead, please contact your dealer.
Trouble Remedy
Nothing works after the Check that the AC Adapter cord is correctly con-
machine has been nected.
switched on.
Will not print or printout is Check the printer connections and settings, and
difficult to read. whether the printer is ON LINE.
All seems normal after the Adjust the brightness controller.
machine has been
switched on, but nothing is
displayed.
Disk operation is not possi- If you are running the machine on the rechargeable
ble. battery, the battery may be low.
The disk has been damaged, or a television set is
located too close to the disk drive. Try with another
disk and/or move the unit.
The disk may be an "HD" disk. Use "1DD" or "2DD"
disks only.
269

Specifications
General
Display LCD, 14 lines x 80 characters

Keyboard 59 keys
Auto repeat function
2 selectable character sets
Memory
Internal (Text) 32K bytes
External 240K bytes (formatted) 3.5" floppy disk
Power Supply AC Adapter (AC120V/DC9V) or
optional rechargeable Ni-Cd Battery
Battery recharge time: 6-15 hours
Battery life: 8 hours (display backlight off)
Memory Backup Battery Lithium
Battery life: 1 year (at room temperature)
Weight 5.0lbs (without rechargeable battery)
Dimensions 11.2" (W) x 1.9" (H) x 9.5" (D)
Interface RS232C connector x 1
Parallel connector x 1
Printer (Parallel) Interface
ot_ Jo
o 0000000000 6)
\. OOO O O O 00 O O OO,/
)()
XICIN3ddV
25 14
25 pin D subminiature Connector
270

Pin No. Signal Name Input/Ouput
1 Data Strobe Output
2 Data 1 Output
3 Data 2 Output
4 Data 3 Output
5 Data 4 Output
6 Data 5 Output
7 Data 6 Output
8 Data 7 Output
9 Data 8 Output
10 Acknowledge Input
11 Busy Input
12 Not Connected
13 Select Input
14 Not Connected
15 Not Connected
16 Input Prime Output
17 Not Connected
18-25 Ground
Driver Circuit
Signal Configuration
Data Strobe (STROBE)
+5V
LS05
33O 4.7k52
2200pF
+5V ±0V
Data 1-8 (DO-D7)
10k0
3352
7 2200pF
LS08
+0V
271

Receiver Circuit
Acknowledge (ACK) +5V
BUSY
Select (SLCT) 101(O LS05
100Q
'V Ar
2200pF
±0V
Communication (RS-232C) Interface
O OO O O
OOOO
6 9
9 pin D subminiature Connector
Pin No. Signal Name Input/Ouput

1 Carrier Detection (CD) Input
2 Reception Data (RxD) Input
3 Transmission Data (TxD) Output
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Output
5 Signal Ground (SG)
6 Data Set Ready (DSR) Input
7 Request To Send (RTS) Output
8 Clear To Send (CTS) Input
9 Not connected
E (Shell) Frame Ground (FG)
XION3ddtt
272

Driver Circuit
Transmission Data (TxD) +12V
Data Terminal Ready
(DTR)
2SA812
Request To Send (RTS)
10052 470pF
1/2W 3.3kO
-12V ±CV
Receiver Circuit
Carrier Detection (CD) +5V
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Clear To Send (CTS) 4:71d2 SN75189
1000pF
±0V
Reception Data (RxD)
SN75189
----°c11000pF
±ov
•
a
273

Glossary
ABBREVIATED PHRASE To increase your typing speed, you can store fre-
quently used phrases in a special abbreviated
phrase file and recall any text string by merely
typing its abbreviation (which has been stored
along with the string).
ACCELERATOR Instead of selecting a function from a menu with
or and then pressing I-RETURN to activate the
function or to display a submenu, you may press
the letter keys that appear in bold on the menu.
This character is called an accelerator.
ADDRESS BOOK The Address Book mode is used to create and edit
lists of names, addresses, telephone numbers, etc.
The data of an Address Book file can be merged
in a text file during printing. If the data contains
telephone and fax numbers, these can be used for
automatic dialing in the COMMUNICATION and
FAX modes.
ALARM The machine allows you to set a single alarm from
the Clock mode (morning alarm, for example), and
up to five different alarms to remind you about
important schedules. These are set in the
Scheduler/Calendar mode.
BACKUP DISK When a disk contains valuable information, use the
disk copy function to make a backup copy of the
disk. Keep the original in a safe place and work
with the copy. This way, if an accident occurs
(accidental erasure, for example) you will still be
able to retrieve your data.
BACKUP BATTERY The internal memory of the machine is protected
by a small, long-life lithium battery. If the battery is
removed or becomes low, the contents of the
memory will be erased.
BLOCK OPERATIONS The block operations on the Create Document
mode allow for on-screen cutting & pasting tasks.
They include block copy, move and delete.
CALCULATOR A screen that looks like a pocket calculator can be
activated from the MAIN MENU or from the Create
Document mode. You can carry out simple arith-
metics problems and insert the result in your text
file, if desired.
m
z
274

CLOCK The machine is equipped with a time clock powered
by the lithium battery. Once the clock is set, it will
display the date and time on the first tine of most
screens. A clock screen is also available which
permanently displays the time in large characters.
COMMUNICATION The Communication mode is used to transmit and
receive files between two PN-4400 or a PN-4400
and a personal computer. This communication is
handled via a cable connected between two units
or through a telephone line and a modem hook-up.
CREATE DOCUMENT The Create Document mode allows you to create
and edit documents such as letters, reports,
chapters of a book, etc.
DATA MERGE An advanced function which allows you to auto-
matically print many copies of a document (a letter,
for example) using variable data (names and
addresses) stored in a separate ADDRESS BOOK
file.
DIALING This machine performs automatic dialing in the Fax
and Communication modes, which means that you
do not have to manually dial on the telephone set.
The telephone number is input directly on the
screen, or selected from the Address Book file.
DISPLAY The LCD display shows the setting indicators, the
text you are typing, function menus, and messages.
The display of this machine is backlit to allow for
operation in a poorly lit place. If you are running
the machine on the rechargeable battery, turn the
back light off to safe energy in a well illuminated
place.
DOUBLE COLUMNS This function allows you to print your document in
PRINTING two columns. On the screen, the text is displayed
continuously as one column.
DUAL SCREEN This function splits the display in half and allows
you to work simultaneously with two documents.
EDITING Editing a file simply means modifying it.
ELITE One of the available pitches on this machine. Elite
pitch corresponds to 12 characters per inch. When
you select this pitch, make sure that the daisy wheel
in use bears the indication "12" (or "1012").
275

FAX The Fax mode allows you to transfer a text file to
a remote fax machine through the telephone line.
To use that mode, you must connect the optional
fax converter between your machine and the
telephone fine.
FOOTER A footer is a line of text that is printed automatically
at the bottom of each page. With this machine, the
footer includes automatic page numbering.
FORMULA In the Spreadsheet mode, you may input data in
order to automatically perform a mathematical
operation.
FUNCTION MENU A listing of available operations that can be per-
formed. By pressing the :MENU' key, you may
choose an operation available for the selected
mode.
HEADER A header is a line of text that is printed automatically
at the top of each page. With this machine, the
header includes automatic page numbering.
HYPHEN SCAN The hyphen scan function detects the lines of the
document with too many blank spaces and helps
you insert hyphens in order to improve the layout.
JUSTIFICATION When a line is printed in justify mode, the machine
divides the total length of the line, minus the length
of the actual characters, by the number of spaces
between words to obtain equal spacing between
words. The first character of the line is aligned with
the left margin, and the last one with the right
margin.
LINE OUT The LINE OUT function allows you to quickly erase
the current line, from the cursor position to the
beginning of the line.
MEMORY A special part of the machine where data can be
stored. An electronic memory is divided into small
units called "bytes" where a single character can
be stored. See also RAM and ROM.
MICRON One of the available pitches on this machine.
Micron pitch corresponds to 15 characters per inch.
MODEM A MODEM (MOdulator/DEModulator) is a device
used to convert data from a form which is com-
patible with a data processing machine to a form
XION3ddV
that is compatible with a transmission device, and

vice-versa.
276

PAGE LAYOUT VIEW The page layout view function of this machine
allows you to preview several pages on the screen
by compressing the size of the characters. On that
screen, you are not able to read your text, but you
have a global view of your document.
PICA One of the available pitches on this machine. Pica
pitch corresponds to 10 characters per inch.
PROTOCOL A set of conventions between communicating
devices regarding the format and contents of
messages to be exchanged. This machine can use
the popular XMODEM protocol.
RAM Random Access Memory -- a memory you can
store in or recall from. All the information you input
from the keyboard is stored in this type of memory.
The RAM is protected by a small lithium battery.
RANGE A range of cells is a portion of the spreadsheet that
is enclosed in a rectangle. Many functions, such
as move, copy, delete, and print can be applied to
a range.
RECALCULATION In the Spreadsheet mode, a result which is related
to other cells through a formula can be recalculated
if the contents of the cells have been modified.
Since recalculation of a large spreadsheet is time
consuming, the machine lets you edit without
recalculating automatically each time you edit a
cell. Recalculation is carried out only when you
activate the function.
RECORD A record is an entry of the Address Book. It may
contain different items but must fit on a single line.
REDUNDANCY CHECK Redundancy check is a function of the Spell
Checker. It detects repeated words.
ROM Read Only Memory. This kind of memory is where
the manufacturer stored the software of this
machine. This permanent memory is not cleared
when you turn the power off.
SCHEDULER / CALENDAR The Scheduler/Calendar mode is used to organize
your schedule. It is equipped with an alarm function
and an electronic calendar.
SEARCH & REPLACE The search and replace function automatically
scans the document and stops at each occurrence
of a specified word. It allows for easy replacement
of a word.
277

SHORT-CUT KEYS Keys that are used to activate a function quickly,
without displaying the function menu..._
SPELL CHECKER The spell checker function automatically checks
your text and warns you when a mistake is detected
(misspelled or redundant word).
SPREADSHEET The Spreadsheet mode allows you to create files
containing numbers to be calculated. Calculation
is performed automatically. This mode is ideal to
create files like financial reports, balance sheets,
check books, paylists, etc.
THESAURUS The Thesaurus function allows for easy replace-
ment of words with synonyms.
WORD OUT The WORD OUT function allows you to quickly
erase the word the cursor is on, from the current
position to the beginning of the word.
WORD WRAP When displaying or printing a file, a word that
cannot fit on a line is automatically "wrapped" to
the next line.
m
z
278

Alphabetic Index
Width (Spreadsheet), 105
Abbreviated Phrase Command Mode, 96
Loading, 181 Commas, 109
Maintenance, 179 Communication Connector, 3
Saving, 182 Contrast Controller, 3
Understanding, 180 Converting
AC Adapter File (Spreadsheet), 121
Connection, 3, 4 Range (Spreadsheet), 116
For charging the battery, 6, 7 Copying
Precautions, 1, 4, 7 All files (disk), 206
Accelerators, 134 Block (Create Document), 157, 158
Accents, 139, 218 File (disk), 204
Alarm Setting File (Memory), 199
Clock, 231 One cell to a range, 98
Scheduler/Calendar, 34 Range (Spreadsheet), 97
Records (Address Book), 60
Back Light Controller Spreadsheet, 119
Location, 3
Precaution, 22 Daisy Wheel Change, 197
Backup Battery Data Bits, 243
Compartment, 3 Data Merge, 210
Function, 15, 16 Dead Keys, 139, 218
Installation, 5 Decimal Tabs
Precautions, 5, 16, 171 Clearing, 145
Replacement, 6 Setting, 145
Baud Rate, 242 Using, 146
Bold Deleting
Create Document, 150 Address Book file, 68
Line by Line, 219 All files (disk), 208
Spreadsheet, 96 All files (memory), 203
Bottom Margin, 184 All words (User dictionary), 173
Bottom Space, 184 Block (Create Document), 159
Character (Create Document), 142
File (disk), 205
Calendar, 48 File (Memory), 200
Spreadsheet, 106 Line (Abbreviated phrase), 180
Cell Address Line (Create Document), 142
Absolute, 97 One column (Address Book), 63
Relative, 97 Records (Address Book), 61
Centering Rows & columns (Spreadsheet), 99
Between margins, 154, 223 Scheduled days, 35, 41
Between tabs, 154 Spreadsheet, 120
Character Keys, 17, 137, 138 Word (Create Document), 142
Cleaning, 1 Word (User dictionary), 173
Clearing a Range, 115 Dial Mode, 257
Clock, 15 Dialing
Code Table, 249-252 Communication, 238
Column Fax, 257
Deleting (Address Book), 63 Using the Address Book, 239, 257
Deleting (Spreadsheet), 99 Disk
Freezing (Spreadsheet), 107 Backup, 13, 206
inserting blank, 100 Delete, 208
Width (Address Book), 72 File operations, 204
279

Format, 13 Function Keys, 19
Index screen, 204 Function Menu, 134-135
Initializing, 12
Precautions, 11 - 13 Glossary, 274
Recommended type, 11
Write-protection, 11
Disk Drive Header, 185-186
Location, 3 Help Menu
Precautions, 1 Create Document, 129
Using with battery, 6, 7 Spreadsheet, 78-79
Disk Eject Button Hot Zone, 136
Location, 3 Hyphen Scan, 165
Precautions, 7, 11
Display
Back light, 21 Indicators, 132
General description, 17 Information Services, 233
Precautions, 1 Inserting
Setting, 3 Blank column (Address Book), 68
Dollar Symbol Blank record (Address Book), 68
Absolute Address, 97 Blank rows & columns (Spread-
Numeric data, 109 sheet), 101
Double Columns Text (Create Document), 141
Previewing, 149 Interference, 1
Printing, 198
Dual Screen
Cancelling, 188
Justification, 148
Switching, 188
Keyboard
Editing American, 18, 137
Daily schedule, 32 ASCII, 18, 137
Label (Address Book), 54 Changing, 17, 137, 218
Record (Address Book), 52 Shifting, 137
Expand Keyboard Control Keys, 18
Create Document, 152
Line by Line, 221 Label, 49
Extra Characters, 138 Line Indent, 147
Line Feed, 243
Fax Adapter Line Out, 142
Line Spacing, 144, 216
Connection, 9
Recommended type, 9 Loading
File Abbreviated phrase, 181
Address Book, 50 Address Book, 73
Compatibility, 137 File, 209
Scheduler/Calendar, 45
Different types of, 16
Length, 194 User dictionary, 174
Recalling a temporary file, 159 Local Echo, 243
Retrieving (Create Document), 195 Log in, 240
Selection (Memory index), 194
Temporary, 158-159 Main Menu, 21
User dictionary, 171, 174-175 Margins
7> File Name, 118,193 Distance between, 144
Filling a Range, 106 For double columns printing, 198
Footer, 185-186 For paragraph indent, 147
rn Format Change Symbol, 143 Line by Line, 216
Formula, 86 Setting, 143

Math Functions, 90 Auto power off, 15
Memory, 16 Charging the battery, 6
Merge Location, 3
Creating a merge file, 210 Precautions, 4, 5
Enabling merge printing, 196 Print Menu
Master document, 210 Address Book, 56
Merge file, 55 Create Document, 195
Printing, 210 Printer
Selecting records for merge printing, Connection, 8
55 Set up, 22
Symbol, 210 Printer Connector, 3
Message Area Printing
Create Document, 131 Abbreviated phrase list, 180
Line by Line, 214 Create Document file, 195
Modem DAILY screen, 35
Connection, 9 Label (Address Book), 57
Recommended type, 233 List (Address Book), 59
Moving MONTHLY screen, 41
Block (Create Document), 160 Page (Create Document), 190
Range (Spreadsheet), 103 Range (Spreadsheet), 104
Records (Address Book), 62 Selected records (Address Book),
67
Numeric Data Spreadsheet, 122
With the merge function, 210
Decimal places, 109 Protocol, 244, 246
Format, 108
Hiding, 110
Percentage, 110 Range
Bold, 96
Clearing, 115
Operator Converting, 116
(Spreadsheet), 86 Copying, 97
Calculator, 226 Copying one cell onto, 98
Order of precedence, 86 Filling (Spreadsheet), 106
Moving, 103
Printing, 104
Page Break, 190 Selecting from, 113
Page Layout View, 149 Sorting, 111
Paper Size, 183 Sorting & selecting from, 115
Paragraph Indent, 147 Underlining, 96
Parallel Connector, 8 Recalculation, 110
Parity, 242 Receiving
Password ASCII file, 246
Cancelling, 26 Text file, 246
Changing, 26 Rechargeable Battery
Overwriding, 26 Charging, 6
Setting, 26 Compartment, 3
Permanent Backspace, 138, 218 Installation, 6
Permanent Hyphen, 136 Precautions, 1, 7
Permanent Space, 136, 221 Record, 49
Pitch Redundant Words, 169
Pica, Elite, Micron, 144 Remaining Space, 194
APPENDIX
Setting, 144 Renaming

Spreadsheet, 104 File (disk), 206
Line by Line, 216 File (Memory), 201
Power input, 3 Spreadsheet, 121
Power Switch Retrieving
281

Spreadsheet, 119
Template, 125 Tabs
t Margin Flush, 155, 224 Clearing, 145
Rw Inserting, 146
Deleting, 99 Removing, 146
Inserting blank, 100 Setting, 145
Using, 145
Template
Saving Exercise, 125
Abbreviated phrase on disk, 182 List of, 124
Address Book on disk, 74 Printing, 126
Scheduler/Calendar, 46 Recalculation, 126
Create Document file (in memory), Retrieving, 125
192 Saving, 127
Create Document file on disk, 202 Text Area
Selected records (Address Book), Create Document, 132
67 Line by Line, 214
Spreadsheet, 118 Paper size setting, 184
User dictionary on disk, 175 Thesaurus
Scale, 131 Edit, 176
Disabling, 186 Line by Line, 178
Search Time Clock, 229
Scheduler/Calendar, 37, 44 Top Margin, 184
Create Document, 162 Top Space, 184
Search & Replace, 164 Transmission Problems, 258
Selecting Transmitter ID, 258
Records (Address Book), 65 Transmitting
Spreadsheet, 113 ASCII file, 244
Self-Demonstration, 26 File (Fax), 254
Serial Connector Text file, 244
Connection, 8 Troubleshooting Chart, 269
Location, 3
Setting Holidays, 42 Underline
Short-cut Keys, 134
Signal Line Control, 243 Create Document, 151
Sort & Select, 115 Line by Line, 220
Sorting Spreadsheet, 96
Address Book, 64 User Dictionary
Spreadsheet, 111 Adding words, 172
Specifications, 270 Loading, 174
Spell Checker Maintenance, 172
Activating, 178, 171 Saving on disk, 175
Disabling, 171 Understanding, 167
Understanding, 167
Status Line Word Out, 142
Create Document, 132
Line by Line, 215 Word Wrap, 136
Stop Bits, 243
Subscript & Superscripts, 152, 222 Xon/Xoff, 243
Superimposed Characters, 138
Symbols
On the scale, 131
On the text area, 133
Synonyms, 176
System Parameters, 16

ACCESSORY ORDER FORM
Dear Customer,
Please use this order form when ordering accessories for your typewriter.
Please add $3.00 for shipping and handling charges. For orders to be shipped
outside of the Continental U.S., please add $10.00 for shipping and handling.
Item No. Price Q'ty Total

MFD-60 A box of ten 3.5" Floppy Disks $26.50
FX-4000 Robotics Pocket Fax Modem Call

for price
BL-2 Business letter template $49.95
BA-4000 Rechargeable Ni-Cd Battery Call

for price
CA-4000 Carrying case Call

for price
* Above pricing subject to change without notice.

For further information on these accessory items, call 901-373-6256.

ACCESSORY ORDER FORM
Dear Customer,
Please use this order form when ordering accessories for your typewriter.
Please add $3.00 for shipping and handling charges. For orders to be shipped
outside of the Continental U.S., please add $10.00 for shipping and handling.
item No. Price Q'ty Total

MFD-60 A box of ten 3.5" Floppy Disks $26.50
FX-4000 Robotics Pocket Fax Modem Call

for price
BL-2 Business letter template $49.95
BA-4000 Rechargeable Ni-Cd Battery Call

for price
CA-4000 Carrying case Call

for price
* Above pricing subject to change without notice.

For further information on these accessory items, call 901-373-6256.

SHIPPING LABEL Sub Total
CA, GA, IL, NJ, NY, LA, SC, VA, TX, TN,
Brother International Corporation
Typewriter Division NC, NM and MA residents add
P.O. Box 1332 applicable sales tax
Bartlett, TN 38184-1332 Total
Add $3.00 for shipping and handling
NAME
Method of payment (check one)
ADDRESS
[ Check or Money Order enclosed
Please charge my [ ] Master card
CITY, STATE, ZIP
] Visa.
Account Number
Expiration Date
Signature
SHIPPING LABEL Sub Total

CA, GA, IL, NJ, NY, LA, SC, VA, TX, TN,
Brother International Corporation
NC; NM and MA residents add
Typewriter Division
P.O. Box 1332 applicable sales tax
Bartlett, TN 38184-1332 Total
Add $3.00 for shipping and handling
NAME Method of payment (check one)
ADDRESS ] Check or Money Order enclosed
Please charge my [ ] Master card
CITY, STATE, ZIP [ ] Visa.
Account Number
i
Expiration Date
Signature

INSERTION SHEET
( INCORRECT ) ( CORRECT )
GRAM SPELL
PAGE o o
18, 19
N. /
PAGE 0 0
18, 19 OPERATE JUST
List of Factory Authorized Service Depots:

J & J SERVICE & SUPPLY J & J SERVICE & SUPPLY
1601 CAPITOL AVENUE 9662 MOCKINGBIRD DRIVE
OMAHA, NE68102 OMAHA, NE68127-2047
(402)331-5952 (402)331-3336
(INCORRECT) (CORRECT)

592101011

Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NOTEBOOK

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

MODEL No.: PN-4400 SERIAL No.:

2 TETRISTm : © 1987 V/O Electronorgtechnica (Elorg). All Rights Reserved.

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Create Document 129

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Line by Line 213

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Optional Accessories for Your otebook Work Organizer

Touchbase Pocket Fax Modem FX-4000)

machine by using the FX-4000.

Business Letter Template Disk ( L-2)

Rechargeable Ni-Cd Battery (BA-4000)

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

(3) Rechargeable insert the optional rechargeable battery here. This

(6) Power Switch Turns the machine on/off.

(7) Contrast Control- Controls the display contrast.

(9) Disk Drive Insert your disks here.

(11) Printer Connec- Connect a parallel printer cable here.

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Connecting the AC Adapter

Plug the supplied AC adapter into an AC outlet

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Use a coin to open the battery compartment cover

Make sure that the positive terminal (+) is facing

Close the cover.

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Installing a Rechargeable Battery

Make sure that the power is turned off.

Insert the battery as shown and press down to

To remove the battery, pull the latch toward the

Charging the Rechargeable Battery

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Precautions Regarding the Rechargeable Battery

Transporting the Machine

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Connect the serial cable of the modem or fax

Connect the telephone cable of the modem or fax

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Connect the NUL MODEM cable to the commu-

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

MF-1DD (Single Sided/Double Density/Double Track)

Inserting and Removing a Floppy Disk

To remove the disk, simply press the disk eject

CAUTION -- The floppy disk may be inserted and

Write-Protecting Your Disks

Put the switch in the READ ONLY position to

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Never open the shutter of the disk and never touch

Do not use magnetic materials near the disk.

Never expose the disk to extremely high or low